Samsung SCC-641P Manuel de l'utilisateur

Samsung SCC-641P Manuel de l'utilisateur
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Owner’s Instructions
Benutzerhandbuch
Manuel d’instruction
Manual del usuario
Istruzioni per l’uso
Part : AB68-00393A(02)
Printed in China
E
D
F
Es
I
Safety Precautions
The purpose of this information is to ensure proper use of this product to
prevent danger or damage to property. Please be sure to observe all
precautions.
* The precautions are divided into "Warnings" and "Cautions" as
distinguished below:
Warning: Ignoring this warning may result in death or serious injury.
Caution: Ignoring this caution may result in injury or damage to property.
Warning instructions alert you to
a potential risk of death
or serious injury.
Caution instructions alert you to the
potential risk of injury or
damage to property.
6. Do not place conductive objects (e.g., screwdrivers, coins, and metal
things) or containers filled with water on top of the camera. (Doing so may
cause personal injury due to fire, electrical shock, or falling objects.)
7. Do not install the unit in humid, dusty, or sooty locations.
(Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock.)
8. If any unusual smells or smoke come from the unit, stop using the product.
In such case, immediately disconnect the power source and contact the
service center. (Continued use in such a condition may cause fire or
electrical shock.)
9. If this product fails to operate normally, contact the store of purchase or
your nearest service center. Never disassemble or modify this product in
any way. (Samsung is not liable for problems caused by unauthorized
modifications or attempted repair.)
10. When cleaning, do not spray water directly onto parts of the product.
(Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock.)
Wipe the surface with a dry cloth. Never use detergents or chemical
cleaners on the product, as this may result in discoloration of surface or
cause damage to the finish.
Warning
1. Be sure to use only the supplied adapter.
(Using an adapter other than the one supplied may cause fire, electrical
shock, or damage to the product.)
2. When connecting the power supply and signal wires, check the external
connection terminals before connecting them. Connect the alarm signal
wires to the alarm terminals, the AC adapter to the AC power input
receptacle, and the DC adapter to the DC power input, making sure that
the correct polarity is observed.
(Connecting the power supply incorrectly may cause fire, electrical shock,
or damage to the product.)
3. Do not connect multiple cameras to a single adapter.
(Exceeding the capacity may cause abnormal heat generation or fire.)
(A falling camera may cause personal injury.)
4. Securely plug the power cord into the power receptacle.
(Insecure connection may cause fire.)
5. When installing the camera on a wall or ceiling, fasten it securely and
firmly. (A falling camera may cause personal injury.)
Caution
1. Do not drop objects on the product or apply strong shock to it. Keep away
from a location subject to excessive vibration or magnetic interference.
2. Do not install in a location subject to high temperature (over 122℉), low
temperature (below 14℉), or high humidity.
(Doing so may cause fire or electrical shock.)
3. Avoid a location which is exposed to direct sunlight, or near heat sources
such as heaters or radiators.
(Neglecting to do so may result in a risk of fire.)
4. If you want to relocate the already installed product, be sure to turn off the
power and then move or reinstall it.
5. Install in a well-ventilated location.
6. Remove the power plug from the outlet when there is a lightning storm.
(Neglecting to do so may cause fire or damage to the product.)
E
Before Usage
Approval of Standards
This is a basic instruction manual for the SCC-641(P) user.
It contains all the instructions needed to use the SCC-641(P) from
a simple introduction of the control locations and functions of the
SCC-641(P) to installation methods in the set up menu.
We recommend all users of the SCC-641(P) from the advanced
user who has used similar cameras before to the general user to
read the instruction manual before using.
The most frequently used feature in the SCC-641(P) would be the
SCC-641(P) Setup Menu.
The SCC-641(P) Setup Menu is explained in detailed in "Chapter
3 Setup Menu Overview".
E
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interface in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
The instructional manual is best used when read from beginning
to end, but for users wanting to read only the part they need here
are the Chapter summaries.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient of relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
"Chapter 1 SCC-641(P) Overview" includes a brief introduction
of the SCC-641(P), part names and functions, and Switch
Settings.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help.
"Chapter 2 SCC-641(P) Installation" explains the installation
procedures of the SCC-641(P) and provides preparation and
installation environment requirements.
"Chapter 3 Setup Menu Overview" presents the structure of the
Setup menu for the SCC-641(P) including a detailed explanation
of the functions performed in each submenu.
"Appendix SCC-641(P) Product Specifications" contains
product specifications of the SCC-641(P) in itemized categories.
1-1
1-2
" Table of contents "
- SHUTTER
3-10
- AGC
3-11
1-1
- WHITE BAL
3-12
SCC-641(P) Overview
1-5
- SPECIAL
3-14
SCC-641(P) Introduction
1-6
- AUTO FOCUS
3-15
SCC-641(P) Location of Controls
1-7
- D-ZOOM
3-15
Locations of Controls - Front
1-7
- EXIT
3-15
Locations of Controls - Back
1-8
PRESET
3-16
ADAPTER CONNECTION
1-9
AUTO MODE
3-18
INITIAL SETTING
1-10
- AUTO PAN
3-18
Setting RS-422A/RS-485 Termination
1-11
- PATTERN
3-20
SWITCH SETTING
1-12
ALARM SET
3-21
SCC-641(P) Installations
2-1
OTHER SET
3-23
Checking Package Contents
2-2
Precautions for Installation and Usage
2-3
Preparing the Cable
2-5
Cable Connection
2-6
SCC-641(P) Installation
2-7
Setup Menu Overview
3-1
Structure of the Setup Menu
3-2
CAMERA BLOCK MENU Contents
3-5
Before Usage
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
- CAMERA ID
3-5
- V-SYNC
3-6
- ZOOM SPEED
3-6
- MOTION DET
3-7
- EXIT
3-8
VIDEO SET MENU
- IRIS
1-3
Appendix Product specifications
E
3-25
3-9
3-9
1-4
Chapter 1 SCC-641(P) Overview
In this chapter we will briefly introduce the SCC-641(P) and
show main functions, locations of control and Switch Setting.
SCC-641(P) Introduction
The SCC-641(P) is the best performing zoom lens integrated surveillance
camera. It can be used with CCTV in banks or companies to provide high
level of security.
E
The SCC-641(P) is a high quality surveillance camera using x22 zoom lens
and digital zoom IC, it can catch clear images up to 220 times.
The SCC-641(P) has Low light function that enables it to take shots in the
environment where there is almost no light, White Balance function that
corrects the picture natural depending on the background lights, Back light
Compensation function that enables objects to be seen clearly even under
bright-background lighting conditions and Auto Focus function that enables it
to focus according to the movement of the object. It is a multifunction camera
that has all the important functions of other surveillance cameras.
The SCC-641(P) uses an Alarm function for alert situations and moving
camera in the direction you want, ZOOM-IN and ZOOM-OUT functions can
be remote controlled.
1-5
1-6
Locations of Control
BACK
FRONT
E
1-7
1-8
ADAPTER CONNECTION
INITIAL SETTING
CAMERA ADDRESS SETUP
Dip Switch setting is same as the following example:
EX) CAMERA ADDR: When it's number 1, set as follows.
1
SCC-641(P) Adapter BOARD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
SW500
Setting communication Protocol
Use number 5~8 PIN of SW501 to set communication Protocol.
PIN
Comp
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
F
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
G
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
ON
ON
ON
I
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
J
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
K
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
L
ON
ON
OFF
ON
M
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
N
ON
OFF
ON
ON
O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P
ON
ON
ON
ON
E
A : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)HALF
B : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)FULL
SEE INSTRUCTIN MANUAL
SW500
SW501
(BOTTOM VIEW)
Baud Rate Setting
Use PIN 3 and 4 of SW501.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
PIN 3
PIN 4
4800 BPS
ON
ON
9600 BPS
OFF
ON
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
38400 BPS
OFF
OFF
BAUD RATE
1-9
1-10
Setting RS-422A/RS-485 termination
SWITCH SETTING
As it is shown in the structure map, when Controller and RS-422A/RS-485 is connected it
should be terminated according to the Cable feature of impedance on the each end of
the transmitting line to transfer the signals in long distance by controlling the reflection of
the signals to the lowest.
n < 128
Division
Termination
SW1-ON
<RS-485 Half Duplex Organization>
Termination: using numbers 1 and 2 PIN, turn to ON and it will be terminated.
n < 128
Division
<RS-422A/RS-485 Full Duplex Organization>
If more than one camera is set of same address, Communication
CAUTION
1-11
error can be occurred.
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
Receiver Address
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
E
1-12
Receiver Address
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1-13
SW500-1 SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7 SW500-8
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Receiver Address
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
E
1-14
Receiver Address
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
1-15
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Receiver Address
SW500-1
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7 SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
E
1-16
Before Installing
Chapter 2 SCC-641(P) Installation
In this chapter we will look over the checkpoints before installation,
installation environmental requirements, and precautions during the
installation of the SCC-641(P). After that we'll show the actual
installation of the SCC-641(P) and cable connections.
Checking Package Contents
Please check that all components listed below are included in the package:
E
SCC-641(P)
Bracket Anchor
Owner’s Instructions
Camera Holder
Cover Body
2-1
2-2
Precautions for Installation and Usage.
Never face the SCC-641(P) towards the sun.
Whether the SCC-641(P) is in use or not, never face it towards the sun. Use
Do not attempt to disassemble the SCC-641(P).
with caution when operating the SCC-641(P) in the vicinity of spotlights or
There is a danger of electric shock if the screws or cover are removed. We
other bright lights and light reflecting objects.
strongly recommend that users avoid handling the interior part of the
SCC-641(P). If it becomes necessary to inspect the inside, please contact
The SCC-641(P) should be operated in a stable environment.
a distributor.
Acceptable operating conditions are listed below:
Temperature : -10℃∼+50℃ (14℉∼122 ℉)
Handle the SCC-641(P) with care.
Humidity level : 90% or less
Although the SCC-641(P) is a durable product, handling the product carefully
E
will lengthen its operating life and prevent failures. Avoid shaking or directly
Proper electric power should be used according to the specifications of
impacting the camera to prevent damage to the product and handle and store
the SCC-641(P) power supply system.
properly.
Power Consumed : 18W
Power Input : 24VAC, 1.5A
Do not expose the SCC-641(P) to rain or moisture or operate it in wet
area.
If the SCC-641(P) comes in contact with water, turn the power switch off
immediately and contact a distributor. Moisture can damage the SCC-641(P)
and increases the danger of electric shock.
Do not use strong detergents or abrasive detergents to clean the
SCC-641(P) body.
If the SCC-641(P) body becomes dirty, use a dry cloth to clean the unit.
In case the dirt is hard to remove, use a mild detergent and wipe gently.
2-3
2-4
Preparing the Cables
Cable Connection
1. First, connect one end of the BNC video cable connector to the Video Output
Terminal (VIDEO OUT)
To install and use the SCC-641(P), the following cables should be prepared.
2. Then, connect the other end of the connector to the Video Input Terminal of
the monitor.
Power Adapter Cable
The cable connected to the Power input terminal of the SCC-641(P) is shown below with
a rated voltage of 24VAC and ampacity of 1.5A.
E
3. Now connect the Power Adapter Cable. Use a driver to screw one part of the two
lines of Power Adapter to Power Input Terminal of the SCC-641(P).
Video Cable
The SCC-641(P)'s cable is a BNC Cable for connecting the video-output terminal to
the video-input terminal of the monitor.
4. Adjust the switch below the Power Adapter to the proper voltage. Then, connect
the Power Adapter's plug to the Power Connector.
5. Connect the Remote Control Terminal of the SCC-641(P) and the external
Controller.
2-5
2-6
4. [Figure 3,4] Connect the various cables to the CAMERA ADAPTER. (See page 2-6)
SCC-641(P) Installation
1. [Figure 1] Install the structure on the ceiling.
(Refer to Installation reference for the Length of the structure)
* Built in by the builder of the structure
E
[Figure 1]
[Figure 3]
[Figure 4]
5. [Figure 5] Match the BRKT-ANCHOR and CAMERA ADAPTER and use 4screws
(PH M4x8) to assemble them.
Lenght of ceiling Hole
2. Make a hole in the ceiling where the camera will be installed.
[Figure 5]
(The hole should be about Φ180)
3. [Figure 2] Assemble the BRKT-ANCHOR on the ceiling and screw the 4 bolts in.
[Figure 2]
2-7
2-8
6. [Figure 6] Match the 3 holes on the back of the CAMERA and the CONNECTOR
and turn it left about 15 degrees.
(Check the sound of LOCKING and that the LEVER-LOCKING is in place)
* Use the screws (BH M3XL8) to connect the CAMERA and the ADAPTER
Chapter 3 Setup Menu Overview
so they don't move.
[Figure 6]
In this chapter, we will look over the Setup Menu of the SCC-641(P),
First we'll look over the overall structure of the Setup Menu, and then
we'll look at the functions of each menu.
E
7. [Figure 7] Assemble the COVER-DOME onto the DOME.
[Figure 7]
2-9
3-1
Structure of the Setup Menu
ALARM SET
CAMERA
VIDEO SET
PRESET
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
EXIT
ON.../OFF
INT/LINE...
1/2/3/4
ON.../OFF
QUIT/SAVE/PRESET
IRIS
ALC.../MANU...
SHUTTER
OFF/1/100~1OK,AUTO/FIX
AGC
ON/OFF
WHITE BAL
ATW/AWC/MANU...
+/SPECIAL ON.../OFF
POSI/NEGA
PIP
ON.../OFF
MIRROR
ON/OFF
H-DTL
V-DTL
RET
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
AF/MF/ONEAF
OFF/ X2 ~ X10
QUIT/SAVE/PRESET
POSITION SET
VIDEO SET
PRESET ID
SCAN
DWELL TIME
EXIT
...
ON.../OFF
ON.../OFF
ON/OFF
1~60S
QUIT/SAVE/DEL
OTHER SET
AUTO MODE
3-2
AUTO PAN
...
PATTERN SET
1/2/3
ALARM PRIORITY SET
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
EXIT
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
QUIT/SAVE
ALARM IN SET
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
EXIT
NO/NC/OFF
NO/NC/OFF
NO/NC/OFF
NO/NC/OFF
QUIT/SAVE
ALARM OUT SET
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
MOTION
EXIT
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
QUIT/SAVE
ALARM PATTERN SET
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
MOTION
EXIT
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/FULL
QUIT/SAVE
AUX OUT CONTROL
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
EXIT
AC
P.P/T
HOME RETURN
HOME POSITION
AUTO FLIP
PRIVACY ZONE
CAM RESET
LANGUAGE
EXIT
E
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
QUIT/SAVE
OFF/6HOUR/12HOUR/18HOUR/24HOUR
ON/OFF
OFF/1~60MIN/2~2HOUR
0~127
ON/OFF
...
...
ENGLISH
QUIT/SAVE
3-3
CAMERA BLOCK MENU Contents
Camera Menu consists of CAMERA SET Menu and VIDEO SET Menu.
The diagram shown above illustrates the overall structure of the Setup Menu.
(VIDEO SET)
In this section, a description of the Setup menu features will enable users of
(CAMERA SET)
the SCC-641(P) to tailor it to their personal needs.
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
EXIT
QUIT
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
EXIT
QUIT
E
CAMERA ID
The CAMERA ID menu assigns an ID to the SCC-641(P) to be displayed on the
connected monitor.On the CAMERA SET menu screen, select CAMERA ID to ON and
press [Enter]. You will see the sub screen for deciding on the ID of the SCC-641(P).
The Camera ID can have up to 12 alphanumeric characters, along with several special
characters.The assigned camera ID may be positioned to any desired location on the
screen by using the LOCATION submenu.
(CAMERA SET)
(CAMERA ID)
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
ON...
INT
3
OFF
EXIT
QUIT
Press
[Enter]
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - +
()/
SP
SP
LOCATION...
RET
SCC-641(P)...
* " ... " Means there are Sub Menus.
3-4
3-5
V-SYNC
(CAMERA SET)
In the V-SYNC menu, vertical synchronization can be
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
selected. The vertical synchronization signal supported
by the SCC-641(P) is the INT mode made by clock inside
MOTION DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
the Area of Motion Detection. If the Motion Detection function is set, the movement of an
intruder can be detected. When motion is detected, it sets off the Alarm signal of the
the SCC-641(P) and LINE mode adjusting vertical
synchronization to the exterior power frequency.
In MOTION DET, you can set the Motion Detection function, Motion Detection Sensitivity, and
EXIT
QUIT
Controller.
(CAMERA SET)
Select LINE and press [Enter]. You will see the LINE LOCK submenu where you can
adjust the phase of the LINE LOCK.
You can use the PHASE menu of the LINE LOCK submenu to assign as much PHASE
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
(MOTION DET)
OFF
INT
3
ON..
Press
[Enter]
as you want.
EXIT
QUIT
USER...
LOW
E
(LINE LOCK)
(CAMERA SET)
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
AREA
SENSITIVITY
RET
Select ON and press [Enter] you will see the "MOTION DET" submenu. The "AREA" menu,
OFF
LINE...
3
OFF
the screen area where the Motion Detection function is going to be applied, can be set as
Press
PRESET or USER. If the "AREA" menu is set to PRESET, the Motion Detection function will
[Enter]
be applied to the basic part of the SCC-641(P)'s factory default presets. Set the AREA menu
EXIT
QUIT
PHASE ( 000)
RET
---- I ----
to USER and press [ENTER], the user can choose the size of the area and location where the
Motion Detection function should be applied.When the area is not blinking, you can use the
[Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to move and set the size. If you press [ENTER] when the area is
ZOOM SPEED
In the ZOOM SPEED menu you can select the speed of
the ZOOM Key (Tele/Wide).
not blinking, it will start to blink and you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the
position of the area. Use the [ENTER] and [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the position and
(CAMERA SET)
menu to selcet the speed.
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
1 : Magnification x 22 takes about 17 seconds
EXIT
QUIT
Use the [Left] or [Right] keys in the ZOOM SPEED
Slowest speed
size of the Motion Detection Area.If you press [ENTER] once more, you will exit the "AREA"
setting menu.Use the "SENSITIVITY" menu to set the sensitivity of the MOTION Detection.The
Higher it is set, the more sensitive the Motion Detection moves.
SIZE
SIZE
2 : Magnification x 22 takes about 10 seconds
Use the
Low speed
[Left, Right, Up, Down]
3 : Magnification x 22 takes about 6 seconds
High speed
4 : Magnification x 22 takes about 3 seconds
Fastest speed
Keys
POSITION
POSITION
*Motion Detection function does not operate while handling slow SHUTTER, PRESET,
SCAN, PATTERN MODE, or JOYSTICK.
3-6
3-7
VIDEO SET MENU
EXIT
The EXIT menu is used to quit the CAMERA SET menu of the SCC-641(P) and return
to the MAIN MENU.
IRIS
The video output level of the monitor can be controlled by the IRIS lens depending on the
- QUIT: Ignores the changed information and restores the saved information.
level of the incoming light.The video output level can be set in the ALC (Auto Light
- SAVE: Saves the information of the setting condition of the menu.
Compensation) menu.The opening and shutting of the Iris lens can be set manually in
- PRESET: Ignores the changed information and restores the initial factory defaults
the MANU menu.
of the menu.
BLC (Submenu of the ALC/MANU menu)
With conventional cameras, strong background lighting interferes with the clarity of
objects, making them appear dark. In the SCC-641(P), setting the BLC (Back Light
(CAMERA SET)
E
Compensation), submenu of ALC/MANU menu, will solve the problem of backlight and
CAMERA ID
V-SYNC
ZOOM SPEED
MOTION DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
give you a clear screen.
ALC
Choose the ALC of the IRIS item and press [ENTER] and set he submenu to the Video
EXIT
QUIT
Output level and BLC will be shown.The Video Output Level can be set in the level item
using the [Left, Right] keys.Set the BLC menu to ON and the Back Light Compensation
function will be applied to the screen areas of AREA menu.The screen area where Back
Light Compensation should be applied can be set with the PRESET or USER item.If the
AREA menu is set to PRESET, the backlight compensation function is applied to the
factory defaults of the SCC-641(P).If the AREA menu is set to USER and [ENTER] is
pressed, the user can select the applied area of the backlight compensation function.
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
(ALC)
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
QUIT
Press
[Enter]
AREA
BLC
LEVEL (0)
RET
PRESET...
OFF
---- I ----
When the area is not blinking, you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to move and
set the size. If you press [ENTER] when the area is not blinking, it will start to blink and
you can use the [Left, Right, Up, Down] key to set the position of the area. Use [ENTER]
and the [Left, Right, Up, Down] keys to set the position and size of the Motion Detection
Area. If you press [ENTER] once more, you will exit the "AREA" setting menu.
3-8
3-9
SIZE
SIZE
(VIDEO SET)
POSITION
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
Use the
[Left, Right, Up, Down]
Keys
POSITION
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
QUIT
MANU
If the IRIS item is set to MANU, the sub screen to open and shut the Iris manually will
be shown. Using the [Left, Right] keys in the LEVEL item you can set Iris manual
setting.
(VIDEO SET)
If your press the left/right keys continuously, the speed will appear in the following order.
E
OFF → 1/100(1/120) → 1/250 → 1/500 → 1/1000 → 1/2000 →
1/4000 → 1/10K → OFF → AUTOX2 → AUTOX4 → AUTOX6→
AUTOX8 → AUTOX12 → AUTOX16 → AUTOX24 → AUTOX32→
AUTOX48 → AUTOX64 → AUTOX96 → AUTOX128 → OFF→
FIX X2 - FIX X4 → FIX X6 → FIX X8 → FIX X12 → FIX X16 →
FIX X24→ FIX X32 → FIX X48 → FIX X64 → FIX X96 → FIX X128
(MANUAL)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
MANU...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
EXIT
QUIT
Press
[Enter]
LEVEL ( 00)
RET
---- I ----
AGC
In the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) menu, you can set the gain automatically when the
brightness of the screen is filmed at less than the standard in low-light conditions.
SHUTTER
In the SHUTTER menu, the high-speed Electric shutter and AUTO low speed shutter of the
SCC-641(P) and the FIX low speed shutter can be set.The High speed Electric Shutter
To automatically control GAIN, set the AGC menu to ON or set it to OFF for manual control.
If the SHUTTER menu is set to AUTO low speed shutter, the value of the AGC menu can
not be changed.
supports 7 different speeds from 1/100 to 1/10,000 of a second. The AUTO low speed
shutter and FIX low speed shutter supports 12 different speeds from 2x to 128x
magnifications.The Low speed shutter is the function that sets the shutter speed to low in
(VIDEO SET)
order to clearly see the object filmed in low light. To automatically slow down the speed of
the shutter by sensing the brightness of the light, set to AUTO low speed shutter. If the user
wants to select the speed of the shutter, set it to FIX.The number after the AUTO and FIX are
the number of the fields stored.The larger the number of the fields, the slower the shutter
speed gets, so in a still screen the screen is much clearer.
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
QUIT
If the object were in motion it would be blurry.
3-10
3-11
WHITE BAL
WHITE BAL
The WHITE BAL menu insures that white is calibrated normally under any color
Lights are generally denoted as color temperatures and expressed in Kelvin (。K)
units.
temperature condition. When the WHITE BAL menu is set to the ATW mode, the white
balance is automatically specified according to the color temperature.In the case of
The general light color temperatures are shown below.
setting the WHITE BAL menu to AWC mode, pressing [ENTER] while having a white
paper in front of the Camera will automatically set the white balance in accordance with
the color temperature only one time.
If WHITE BAL menu is set to MANUAL mode, the user can set the white Balance
10000。K
9000。K
E
considering the current illumination.
Blue sky
Rainy
- 3200。K : Set color temperature to 3200。K
- 5600。K : Set color temperature to 5600。K
8000。K
- User : Set the appropriate value in the RED and BULE graph.
Cloudy
7000。K
MANU: Select MANU item and press [ENTER], the sub screen where you can select
manual White Balance will be shown.
6000。K
5000。K
Partly Cloudy
Use the left/right keys to select 3200。K, 5600。K or USER mode in the PRESET menu.
Sunny
(VIDEO SET)
4000。K
Fluorescent lamp
3000。K
Halogen lamp
(AWB/MANU)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
ALC...
OFF
ON
MANU...
OFF
AF
OFF
EXIT
QUIT
Press
[Enter]
PRESET OFF(USER)..
RED (00)
---- I ---BLUE (00)
---- I ---RET
2000。K
Tungsten lamp
Candlelight
1000。K
3-12
3-13
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
In the SPECIAL menu, POSI/NEGA, PIP, Mirror, and vertical and horizontal detail level
can be adjusted.
- POSI/NEGA: Video output signal is outputted normal/reverse.
- PIP(Picture in Picture): When Digital Zoom is activated, the 1/16 minimized screen
will be shown.
- Mirror: Reverse the video output signal.
- H-DTL: Adjust Horizontal Detail Level.
- V-DTL: Adjust Vertical Detail Level.
Select ON and press [ENTER], the "SPECIAL" submenu to choose the special
functions will be shown.
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
Press
[Enter]
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIRROR
H-DTL ( 0)
V-DTL ( 0)
RET
+
OFF
OFF
---- I ---- I ---
E
(VIDEO SET)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
(SPECIAL)
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
ON...
AF
OFF
QUIT
In the AUTO FOCUS MENU, the Focus method can be set to AF, MF,
or ONEAF.
- AF: With AUTO FOCUS MODE, you can monitor the screen continuously and it will focus
automatically. While moving the zoom keys, it will automatically focus so FOCUS
key input is not necessary.
- MF: In MANUAL FOCUS MODE the user adjusts the Focus manually.
- ONEAF: In ONEAF mode the SCC-641(P) auto focuses only while moving/stopping.
When the SCC-641(P) is not moving it is same as MF mode and when it's
moving/stopping it's the same as AF mode.
Use the left/right keys to select AF, MF or ONEAF in the AUTO FOCUS menu.
ALC..
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
QUIT
D-ZOOM
In the D-ZOOM menu you can choose the Digital Zoom magnification.
You can select a magnification from OFF to 10 times.
To choose functions use the left/right keys to select an item.In the PIP menu, select ON
and press [ENTER]. Use the [left, right, up, down] keys to set the location of the PIP.
When Digital Zoom is selected at 10 times, it is the Optic Zoom for 22 times the size so
the camera can film at up to 220 times.
Use the [left, right] keys to select the magnification in the D-ZOOM menu.
※ PIP does not function in low speed SHUTTER MODE.
When Mirror is functioning, Mirror does not function in the PIP windows.
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIRROR
H-DTL ( 0)
V-DTL ( 0)
RET
+
ON...
OFF
---- I ------ I -----
Press
[Enter]
(VIDEO SET)
(VIDEO SET)
ALC..
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
OFF
QUIT
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
WHITE BAL
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
EXIT
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
AF
X10
QUIT
PIP Screen
EXIT
It's the same as the EXIT function of the CAMERA SET menu.
3-14
3-15
PRESET
A total of 128 presets are available including the selection of PAN/TILT location and
Zoom/Focus, and setting up screen conditions and monitoring. (0 ~ 127)
Among the 128 PRESETS PRESET 0: HOME POSITION, PRESET 1: ALARM1,
PRESET 2: ALARM2, PRESET 3: ALARM3, PRESET 4: ALARM4,PRESET 5: set as
POSITION SET
PRESET NO.0
From "POSITION SET..." press [ENTER] to get into the
SET PAN/TILT
SET ZOOM/FOCUS
PAN/TILT, FOCUS/ZOOM SET screen to set the PAN/TILT
location and FOCUS/ZOOM condition then press [ENTER]
to return to a higher menu.
special preset corresponding MOTION.
VIDEO SET
This is the screen setting function for each PRESET.
Refer to the explanation under "VIDEO SET menu".
** MAIN MENU **
E
(PRESET MAP)
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
Press
[Enter]
0H1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 î ï RET
ID:PRESET 0
PRESET ID
PRESET NO.0 ID
This is the ID set up function for each PRESET.
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:! - + * ()/
SP
SP
LOCATION...
RET
PRESET 0....
It can be set up to 12 characters using the left, right, up,
and down keys.
The ID location can be set in the submenu of
"LOCATION..."
PRESET NO.0
SCAN
PRESET NO.0
This function sets up for movement or no movement in
Press
[Enter]
POSITION SET
VIDEO SET
PRESET ID
SCAN
DWELL TIME
...
ON...
ON...
ON
2S
"SCAN" motion.
ON...
ON...
ON
2S
When it's PRESET to "ON" it includes SCAN motion
and to "OFF" no movement.
EXIT
POSITION SET...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET ID
SCAN
DWELL TIME
EXIT
QUIT
QUIT
DWELL TIME
This is a function setting for the DWELL TIME of the PRESET location in "SCAN" motion.
It can set DWELL TIME From 1 ~ 60 Sec.
EXIT
"QUIT": Does not save the selected information and returns to a higher menu.
"SAVE": Do saves the selected information and returns to a higher menu.
"DEL" : Deletes the selected information and restores the DEFAULT.
Then returns to a higher menu.
3-16
3-17
AUTO MODE
END SET
AUTO PAN and PATTERN functions are in AUTO MODE.
SET END!
"END SET" gets into the END SET setup screen by
AUTO PAN
After selecting the locations of two points (PAN/TILT) of START and END, it loops
pressing [ENTER]. Adjust PAN/TILT location and
press [ENTER] to return to a higher menu.
continuously in the set up SPEED.
DIRECTION
** MAIN MENU **
(AUTO MODE)
Set up the movement direction of the START to END location (PAN location standard)
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
AUTO PAN ...
PATTERN SET 1...
E
Press
"RIGHT " :
"LEFT " :
[Enter]
RET
AUTO PAN
Press
[Enter]
START SET
END SET
DIRECTION
ENDLESS
SPEED
DWELL TIME
...
...
RIGHT
ON
STEP5
2 S
EXIT
QUIT
ENDLESS
This is a 360-degree rotation function that only stops for the DWELL TIME in the START and
END positions. It can be set to "ON" or "OFF".
START SET
SPEED
From "START SET..." get into the START SET setup
screen by pressing [ENTER]. After selecting the
SET START!
This is a setting function for movement speed setup. It can be set from STEP1 to
STEP64.
locations of PAN/TILT location, press [ENTER] again to
return to higher menu.
DWELL TIME
This is a function for setting up the time to stay in the START to END position.
3-18
3-19
PATTERN
ALARM SET
This is a replay function so that the MANUAL functions such as PAN, TILT, ZOOM,
It consists of 4 ALARM INPUTs and 3 ALARM OUTs.It can sense an ALARM input from
and FOCUS are played for 30 seconds.
exterior SENSORs and it performs with PRESET or PATTERN function and outputs the
ALARM OUT signals.
It recognizes the ALARM signal input as an ALARM signal when it continnes more than
** MAIN MENU **
150ms for a time and each ALARM movement time is decided depending on it's
(AUTO MODE)
correspondence to the DWELL TIME of the PRESET and PATTERN connected.
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
Press
AUTO PAN
PATTERN SET
...
1...
[Enter]
( ALARM SET)
** MAIN MENU **
CAMERA...
VIDEO SET...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM SET...
OTHER SET...
RET
Press
[Enter]
ALARM PRIORITY SET..
ALARM IN SET..
ALARM OUT SET..
ALARM PATTERN SET..
AUX OUT CONTROL..
E
RET
PATTERN1 SET
Press
[Enter]
ALARM PRIORITY SET
ALARM PRIORITY
Sets the priority of the 4 ALARM inputs and corresponds to
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
1
2
3
4
EXIT
QUIT
priority.The priority of the DEFAULT is ALARM1: 1, ALARM2:
2, ALARM 3: 3, ALARM: 4.If the ALARM is working at the
same time and the priority is the same, it will operate
according to the DEFAULT priority.While the ALARM is
working, it cannot detect MOTION.
PATTERN can be set to 3. Choose 1, 2, or 3 with the left or right key in the "PATTERN
SET" and press [ENTER] to get into the PATTERN set up screen.
From the moment "PATTERN 1 SET" is gone for 30 seconds, it memorizes the
MANUAL movements and after 30 seconds it will return to a higher menu.
If you want to finish set up before the 30-second ends, press [ENTER].
ALARM IN SET
Set the TYPE to "NO" (Normal Open), "NC" (Normal Close),
or "OFF" depending on the features of the SENSOR
ALARM IN
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
NO
NC
NO
NC
EXIT
QUIT
connected.
3-20
3-21
ALARM OUT
Each ALARM input corresponds to one of the 3
ALARM OUT. < The ALARM3 is designed as the
OTHER SET
ALARM OUT
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
MOTION
1
2
3
2
1
AC(Auto Calibration)
ALARM PATTERN
This function turns on or off Auto Calibration. SCC-C641(P) has the Auto Calibration
function to improve the precision of LENS and PAN/TILT motor.
You may set to OFF/6HOUR/12HOUR/18HOUR/24HOUR. Without user’s key input for
the time designated by the user, A.C. will appear on the screen while initializing LENS
and PAN/TILT.
This sets the operation of PATTERN movements when
P.P/T(Proportional PAN/TILT)
inputting ALARM.
This function controls the PAN/TILT speed to the ZOOM magnification ratio during the
manual operation of PAN/TILT. If you set PROPORTIONAL P/T to ON, the PAN/TILT
speed will increase in the ZOOM WIDE mode and decrease in the ZOON TELE mode
even in the same manual operation.
Relay OUT >
EXIT
When the ALARM is inputted the correspondence will
be as follows: ALARM1 input to PRESET 1, ALARM 2
input to PRESET 2, ALARM3 input to PRESET 3,
ALARM 4 input to PRESET 4, and MOTION input to
QUIT
ALARM PATTERN
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
MOTION
OFF
OFF
1
2
3
PRESET 5.
When the ALARM is working, it will stay in the PRESET
E
HOME RETURN
When there is no KEY input or other movement for a certain time, the camera moves to
EXIT
QUIT
location corresponding the ALARM for the DWELL
the HOME location automatically. The HOME location can be assigned from the HOME
POSITION menu.
TIME and the ALARM connected to the PATTERN will
continuously operate the PATTERN movements.
SET UP TIME FOR HOME RETURN:
The OFF in the Setup Menu does not operate the PATTERN, and it means 1 →
PATTERN1, 2 → PATTERN 2, 3 → PATTERN 3, continuous motion of HALF1 →
OFF: HOME RETURN function cancellation
PATTERN 1 + PATTERN 2, continuous motion of HALF 2 → Pattern 2 + PATTERN 3
OFF ➞ 1 MIN ➞ 2 MIN ➞ 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ➞ ~12HOUR
and continuous motion of FULL → PATTERN 1+PATTERN2+PATTERN3.
HOME POSITION
AUX OUT CONTROL
You can select the HOME POSITION from the preset positions numbered between 0
and 127.
This sets the ALARM OUT motion to continue or act only
AUX OUT CONTROL
when the ALARM is working.
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
If it is set to OFF the ALARM OUT motion will operate
OFF
OFF
ON
only when the ALARM is set off (Active "Low"), and if it's
3-22
When operating the Tilt to the 90° limit using the Joystick, the camera PAN automatically
revolves 180° showing the opposite area of the Tilt area.
It gives the effect of extending the Tilt operating area 180°.
set to ON, the ALARM OUT will always operate
regardless of the ALARM.
AUTO FLIP
EXIT
QUIT
3-23
CAM RESET
Product specifications
CAM RESET clears all the settings made so far and restores the factory default settings.
"CAMERA RESET?" message appears when you select CAM RESET.
Select "CANCEL" to return to the menu setup display or select OK to restore the factory
default settings.
●
Be careful when performing a CAM RESET operation, as it deletes all setup values.
SCC-641
NO
Items
1
Product Type
Contents
- Zoom lens single body COMBI DOME CAMERA
- AC 24± 10% (60Hz± 0.3Hz)
2
Power Input
3
Power Consumption
4
Broadcasting Type
5
Image Device
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Effective Pixels
- 768(H) × 494(V)
7
Scanning Mode
- 525 Lines, 2:1 Interlace
8
Scanning line Frequency
- 18W
- NTSC STANDARD COLOR SYSTEM
- Horizontal : 15, 734 Hz(INT) / 15, 750 Hz(L/L)
Vertical
E
: 59.94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
9
Synchronization Mode
10
Resolution
- 480 TV LINES
11
S/N Ratio
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
12
Min. Object Illumination
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 0.3 Lux (SENS UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
13
Color Temperature
14
Signal Output
- ATW/AWC/MANUAL MODE
(3200。K, 5600。K, R/B GAIN Court)
- COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- one body; 22X Zoom lens
15
Lens
- Focal length : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Aperture : F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Auto Focus
- PAN range : 360。Endless
16
PAN Function
- Preset Pan Speed : 240。/sec, maximum
- Manual Pan Speed : 0.8。~ 90。/sec (64Step)
17
TILT Function
- TILT range : 0。~ 90。
- Preset Tilt Speed : 150。/sec, maximum
18
REMOTE CONTROL
- Manual Tilt Speed : 0.8。~ 45。/sec (64Step)
- Tele/Wide(ZOOM), Near/Far(FOCUS),
Iris Open/Close, Pan/Tilt
19
ALARM
20
Operation Temperature
21
Operation Humidity
22
SIZE
23
3-24
Weight
- Alarm Inputs : 4 IN(5mA Sink)
- Alarm Outputs : 3 OUT (Open collector : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relay : 1, NO, NC, COM
2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC Max)
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- ~90%
- DOME : 147 (
Outline : 159.5(
),
) x 176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-25
Product specifications
SCC-641P
Contents
NO
Items
1
Product Type
2
Power Input
3
Power Consumption
4
Broadcasting Type
5
Image Device
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Effective Pixels
- 752(H) × 582(V)
7
Scanning Mode
- 625 Lines, 2:1 Interlace
8
Scanning line Frequency
Cautions
- Zoom lens single body COMBI DOME CAMERA
- AC 24± 10% (50Hz± 0.3Hz)
- 18W
· The copyright of the manual belongs to Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
- PAL STANDARD COLOR SYSTEM
· Without the permission of Samsung Electronics it cannot be reproduced
electronically, mechanically, audibly, or by any other method.
- Horizontal : 15, 625 Hz(INT) / 15, 625 Hz(L/L)
Vertical
·This manual will be modified according to product enhancements.
E
: 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
9
Synchronization Mode
10
Resolution
- 480 TV LINES
11
S/N Ratio
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
12
Min. Object Illumination
- INT/LINE LOCK
- 0.3 Lux (SENS UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
13
Color Temperature
14
Signal Output
- ATW/AWC/MANUAL MODE
(3200。K, 5600。K, R/B GAIN Court)
- COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- one body; 22X Zoom lens
15
Lens
- Focal length : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Aperture : F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Auto Focus
- PAN range : 360。Endless
16
PAN Function
- Preset Pan Speed : 240。/sec, maximum
- Manual Pan Speed : 0.8。~ 90。/sec (64Step)
- TILT range : 0。~ 90。
17
TILT Function
- Preset Tilt Speed : 150。/sec, maximum
- Manual Tilt Speed : 0.8。~ 45。/sec (64Step)
18
REMOTE CONTROL
19
ALARM
20
Operation Temperature
21
Operation Humidity
22
SIZE
- Tele/Wide(ZOOM), Near/Far(FOCUS),
Iris Open/Close, Pan/Tilt
- Alarm Inputs : 4 IN(5mA Sink)
- Alarm Outputs : 3 OUT (Open collector : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relay : 1, NO, NC, COM
2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC Max)
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- ~90%
- DOME : 147 (
Outline : 159.5(
23
3-26
Weight
),
) x 176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-27
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Benutzerhandbuch
D
6. Platzieren Sie keine leitfähigen Gegenstände (wie z. B. Schraubenzieher,
Münzen und metallene Objekte) oder mit Wasser gefüllte Behälter auf der
Kamera. (Dies kann zur Verletzung von Personen durch Feuer, Stromschlag
oder herunterfallende Gegenstände führen.)
Sicherheitshinweise
Ziel dieser Informationen ist es, den ordnungsgemäßen Gebrauch dieses
Geräts sicherzustellen und dadurch Gefahren oder Sachbeschädigungen zu
vermeiden. Bitte befolgen Sie alle Anweisungen.
* Die Sicherheitshinweise sind mit “Warnung” und “Achtung”
gekennzeichnet, wie nachfolgend angegeben:
Warnung: Die Nichtbeachtung eines Warnhinweises kann zum Tode oder
zu schweren Verletzungen führen.
Achtung: Die Nichtbeachtung eines mit Achtung gekennzeichneten
Hinweises kann zu Verletzungen und Sachschaden führen.
Die mit Warnung gekennzeichneten
Informationen weisen auf eine mögliche
Gefahr hin, die zum Tode oder zu
schweren Verletzungen führen kann.
Die mit Achtung gekennzeichneten
Informationen weisen auf eine mögliche
Gefahr hin, die zu Verletzungen oder
Sachschaden führen kann.
Warnung
1. Achten Sie darauf, dass Sie nur den mitgelieferten Adapter verwenden.
(Die Verwendung eines anderen Adapters als des mitgelieferten kann Feuer,
einen Stromschlag oder die Beschädigung des Geräts verursachen.)
2. Beim Anschließen der Netz- und Signalkabel müssen zuvor die externen
Anschlussbuchsen überprüft werden. Schließen Sie die Alarmsignalkabeladern
an die Alarmanschlüsse, den Netzadapter an die Netzsteckdose und den
Gleichstromadapter an den Gleichstromeingang an, und achten Sie dabei auf
die richtige Polarität.
(Ein falscher Anschluss an das Stromnetz kann zu Feuer, einem Stromschlag
oder zur Beschädigung des Geräts führen.)
3. Schließen Sie nicht mehrere Kameras an einen Adapter an.
(Wird die Kapazität überschritten, kann es zu einer anormalen
Wärmeentwicklung oder Feuer kommen.)
(Fällt die Kamera herunter, kann es zur Verletzung von Personen kommen.)
4. Stecken Sie das Netzkabel fest in die Steckdose ein.
(Ein loser Anschluss kann einen Brand verursachen.)
5. Bei der Wand- oder Deckeninstallation ist darauf zu achten, dass die Kamera
sicher und fest angebracht wird. (Fällt die Kamera herunter, kann es zur
Verletzung von Personen kommen.)
7. Die Kamera darf nicht an einem feuchten, staubigen oder rußigen Ort installiert
werden. (Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
8. Bei ungewöhnlicher Geruchs- oder Rauchentwicklung muss der Betrieb des
Geräts sofort beendet werden. Ziehen Sie unverzüglich den Netzstecker und
setzen Sie sich mit einem Kundendienstzentrum in Verbindung.
(Die Weiterbenutzung des Geräts kann zu einem Brand oder elektrischen
Schlag führen.)
9. Wenn das Gerät nicht einwandfrei funktioniert, wenden Sie sich bitte an die
Verkaufsstelle, in der Sie das Gerät erworben haben, oder an das nächste
Kundendienstzentrum. Das Gerät darf niemals und in keiner Weise selbst
zerlegt oder modifiziert werden. (Samsung übernimmt keine Haftung für
Probleme, die durch unbefugte Abänderungen oder einen Reparaturversuch
herbeigeführt sind.)
10. Wasser darf beim Reinigen niemals direkt auf die Geräteteile gelangen.
(Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
Die Oberfläche kann mit einem trockenen Tuch abgewischt werden.
Verwenden Sie keine Reinigungsmittel oder chemischen Reiniger, da sich
durch solche Mittel die Farbe ablösen und der Oberflächenüberzug beschädigt
werden kann.
Achtung
1. Lassen Sie keine Gegenstände auf das Gerät fallen, und schützen Sie es vor
starken Stößen. Setzen Sie die Kamera keinen starken Vibrationen oder
magnetischen Störfeldern aus.
2. Die Kamera darf nicht an Orten mit hohen bzw. tiefen Temperaturen
(über 50 °C und unter -10 °C) oder hoher Luftfeuchtigkeit installiert werden.
(Andernfalls besteht die Gefahr eines Brandes oder Stromschlags.)
3. Installieren Sie das Gerät nicht in der Nähe von Wärmequellen, wie z. B.
einem Heizgerät oder Heizkörper, und an Orten, an denen es direktem
Sonnenlicht ausgesetzt ist. (Hier besteht Feuergefahr.)
4. Wenn Sie die bereits installierte Kamera an einen anderen Ort verlegen
wollen, achten Sie darauf, die Kamera auszuschalten, bevor Sie sie
abnehmen oder neu installieren.
5. Die Installation sollte an einer gut belüfteten Stelle erfolgen.
6. Ziehen Sie bei einem Gewitter den Netzstecker. (Wird dies nicht beachtet,
kann ein Brand verursacht oder das Gerät beschädigt werden.)
D
Vor Inbetriebnahme
Normzulassungen
Dies ist ein grundlegendes Benutzerhandbuch für Nutzer der
Speed- Dome Kamera SCC-641(P). Es enthält alle notwendigen
Hinweise für den Betrieb der SCC-641(P) von der einfachen
Einführung der Bedienungselemente der SCC-641(P) und deren
Funktionen bis hin zu Installationsmethoden im Setup-Menü.
Wir empfehlen allen Nutzern der SCC-641(P), dieses Handbuch
vor dem Gebrauch zu lesen, sowohl den erfahrenen Nutzern, die
ähnliche Kameras bereits verwendet haben, als auch den
gewöhnlichen Nutzern.
Das am häufigsten benutzte Merkmal der Speed-Dome Kamera
SCC-641(P) ist das SCC-641(P) Setup-Menü.
Das SCC-641(P) Setup-Menü wird im Kapitel 3 : Überblick über
das Setup-Menü genau erklärt.
Es ist am sinnvollsten, das Handbuch von vorn bis hinten zu
lesen, aber für diejenigen, die nur aktuell benötigte Auszüge
lesen wollen, sind hier die Kapitelzusammenfassungen.
"Kapitel 1 : Überblick über die SCC-641(P) ” enthält eine kurze
Einführung in die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P), ihre
Einzelteile und Funktionen und Schaltereinstellungen.
"Kapitel 2 : Installation der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)”
erklärt die Installationsanweisung der SCC-641(P) und informiert
über Vorbereitungen und Randbedingungen der Inbetriebnahme.
D
Hinweis : Dieses Gerät wurde getestet und entsprechend den Grenzwerten als ein
Digitalgerät der Klasse B gemäß Abschnitt 15 der FCC Richtlinien eingestuft.
Diese Grenzwerte wurden festgelegt um einen angemessenen Schutz gegen
gesundheitsgefährdende Berührung bei Installation in der Wohnumgebung zu
gewährleisten. Dieses Gerät erzeugt und benutzt elektromagnetische Strahlung und
kann elektromagnetische Strahlung aussenden. Wenn das Gerät nicht der Anleitung
entsprechend installiert und in Betrieb genommen wird, kann es zu Störungen bei
der Radiokommunikation kommen.
Eine Störung bei einer bestimmten Installation kann jedoch nicht ausgeschlossen
werden.
Wenn das Gerät störende Interferenzen beim Radio- oder Fernsehempfang
verursacht, was durch ein oder Ausschalten des Geräts überprüft werden kann,
sollte einer oder mehrere der folgenden Ratschläge befolgt werden:
- Drehen oder versetzen sie die Empfangsantenne.
- Vergrößern Sie den Abstand zwischen Gerät und Empfänger.
- Schließen Sie das Gerät an eine andere Steckdose an als den Empfänger.
- Wenden Sie sich an den Händler oder einen erfahrenen Radio- und
Fernsehtechniker und bitten um Hilfe.
"Kapitel 3 : Überblick über das Setup-Menü” erläutert die
Struktur des Setup-Menüs der SCC-641(P) einschließlich einer
ausführlichen Erklärung der verfügbaren Funktionen in jedem
Untermenü.
"Anhang A : Technische Daten der Speed-Dome Kamera
SCC-641(P)”enthält Produktspezifikationen der SCC-641(P) in
tabellarischer Übersicht.
1-1
1-2
“Inhaltsverzeichnis”
3-10
- AGC
3-11
Vor Inbetriebnahme
1-1
- WEISSABGL
3-12
Kapitel 1
Überblick über die SCC-641(P)
1-5
- SPEZIAL
3-14
Einführung in die SCC-641(P)
1-6
- AUTO FOKUS
3-15
Steuerungselemente der SCC-641(P)
1-7
- D-ZOOM
3-15
Steuerungselemente Vorderseite
1-7
- AUSGANG
3-15
Steuerungselemente Rückseite
1-8
PRESET
3-16
ADAPTERANSCHLUSS
1-9
AUTO MODE
3-18
ERSTEINSTELLUNG
1-10
- Auto PAN
3-18
Einstellung der RS-422A/RS-485 Abschlüsse
1-11
- PATTERN
3-20
Schaltereinstellung
1-12
- ALARM PROG
3-21
Installation der SCC-641(P) Installation
2-1
- WEITERE PROG
3-23
Überprüfen des Packungsinhalts
2-2
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für Installation und Betrieb
2-3
Vorbereitung der Kabel
2-5
Kabelanschlüsse
2-6
Installation der SCC-641(P)
2-7
Überblick über das Setup Menü
3-1
Aufbau Setup Menüs
3-2
Inhalt des KAMERA Block Menüs
3-5
- KAMERA ID
3-5
- SYNC
3-6
- ZOOM GESCH
3-6
- AKTIVITAET
3-7
- AUSGANG
3-8
VIDEO PROG MENU
3-9
- BLENDE
3-9
Kapitel 2
Kapitel 3
1-3
- SHUTTER
Technische Daten
D
3-25
1-4
Kapitel 1 : Überblick über die SCC-641(P)
In diesem Kapitel werden die Funktionen der SCC-641(P)
kurz beschrieben. Die Hauptfunktionen,
Steuerungselemente und Schaltereinstellungen werden
erläutert.
Einführung in die SCC-641 (P)
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ist eine hochwertige
Überwachungskamera mit integriertem ZOOM-Objektiv. Sie kann mit CCTV
in Banken oder Firmengebäuden eingesetzt werden, um höchste Sicherheit
zu gewährleisten.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ist eine hochqualitative
D
Überwachungskamera mit x22 Zoom-Objektiv und einem digitalen
10- fach Zoom. Sie kann scharfe Kamerabilder bis zu 220-fach auffangen.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) hat eine Lichtverstärkung (Low Light
Funktion), die es ermöglicht, Aufnahmen zu machen, auch wenn fast kein
Licht vorhanden ist, einen Weißabgleich (White Balance Function), der
natürliche Bilder entsprechend dem Hintergrundlicht korrigiert, einem
Gegenlichtausgleich (Back Light Compensation Function), der ermöglicht,
Objekte auch bei intensivem Gegenlicht scharf zu sehen und einen
Auto FoKUS, der eine Anpassung des Fokus an die
Bewegung von Objekten ermöglicht. Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
ist eine Multifunktionskamera, die alle wichtigen Funktionen anderer
Überwachungskameras besitzt.
Die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) besitzt eine Alarmfunktion für
Gefahrensituationen und ist eine in beliebige Richtungen bewegliche
Kamera. ZOOM-IN und ZOOM-OUT-Funktionen können ferngesteuert
werden.
1-5
1-6
Steuerungselemente
Rückseite
Vorderseite
D
1-7
1-8
ADAPTERANSCHLUSS
ERSTEINSTELLUNG
KAMERAADRESSE EINSTELLUNG
Dip Switch setting (Dip-Schalter-Einstellung) ist gleich wie das folgende Beispiel: EX)
KAMERA ADDR: Wenn ihre Ziffer 1 ist, stellen Sie so ein.
1
SCC-641(P) Adapter BOARD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
SW500
Einstellung des Kommunikationsprotokolls.
Benutzen Sie die Ziffern 5 bis 8 PINs von SW501, um das Kommunikationsprotokoll
einzustellen.
D
PIN
Comp
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
F
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
G
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) HALF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) VOLL
H
ON
ON
ON
I
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
J
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
K
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
L
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SW500
M
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW501
N
ON
OFF
ON
ON
O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEEBEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
INSTRUCTIN MANUAL
SIEHE
(UNTERSEITE)
Einstellung der Baudrate
Verwenden Sie PIN 3 und 4 von SW501.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
PIN 3
PIN 4
4800 BPS
ON
ON
9600 BPS
OFF
ON
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
38400 BPS
OFF
OFF
BAUD RATE
1-9
1-10
Einstellung der RS-422A/RS-485 Abschlüsse
Schaltereinstellung
Empfänger-adresse
Wenn der Controller und RS-422A/RS-485 Buchsen verbunden sind, sollte, wie in der
Übersicht dargestellt, der Abschluss entsprechend der Impedanz (des
Scheinwiderstandes) des jeweiligen Übertragungsweges eingestellt werden, um Signale
bei großen Entfernungen durch Kontrolle der Reflektionen auf der Leitung
auszugleichen.
n < 128
Division
Termination
SW1-ON
<RS-485 Half Duplex Organisation>
Abschluss: Verwenden Sie PIN-Nummer 1 und 2, Schalten auf ON bedeutet Abschluss.
n < 128
Division
<RS-422A/RS-485 Full Duplex Organisation>
VORSICHT
Wenn mehr als eine Kamera auf die gleiche Adresse eingestellt ist,
können Kommunikationsprobleme auftreten.
1-11
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-12
D
Empfänger-adresse
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1-13
SW500-1 SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7 SW500-8
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Empfänger-adresse
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
D
1-14
Empfänger-adresse
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
1-15
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Empfänger-adresse
SW500-1
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7 SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
D
1-16
Vor der Installation
Kapitel 2 : Installation der SCC-641(P)
In diesem Kapitel werden wichtige Punkte vor der Installation,
Voraussetzungen für die Installationsumgebung und
Vorsichtsmaßregel während der Installation der SCC-641(P)
Kameraeinheit beschrieben. Dann wird gezeigt, wie die eigentliche
Installation der SCC-641(P) Kameraeinheit und Kabelanschüsse
durchgeführt werden sollten.
Überprüfung des Verpackungsinhalts
Überprüfen Sie bitte, ob alle unten aufgelisteten Teile in der Packung enthalten sind :
D
SCC-641(P)
Haltewinkel
Bedienerhandbuch
Kamerahalterung
Abdeckungsteile
2-1
2-2
Vorsichtsmassnahmen für Installation und Betrieb.
Richten Sie die SCC-641(P) nie zur Sonne aus.
Unabhängig davon, ob die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) in Betrieb ist
Bauen Sie die SCC-641(P) nicht auseinander.
oder nicht, darf sie nie zur Sonne ausgerichtet werden. Seien sie vorsichtig,
Es besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, wenn die Schrauben oder
wenn Sie die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) in der Nähe von
das Gehäuse entfernt werden. Den Nutzern sei dringend abgeraten, mit den
Scheinwerferlicht oder hellem Licht oder stark reflektierenden Objekten
inneren Teilen der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu hantieren. Wenn ein
verwenden.
Öffnen des Gerätes erforderlich ist, kontaktieren Sie bitte den Händler.
Die SCC-641(P) sollte in einer stabilen Umgebung aufgestellt werden.
Gehen Sie mit der SCC-641(P) sorgsam um.
Zulässige Betriebsbedingungen:
Auch wenn die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ein haltbares Produkt ist,
Temperatur : -10°C bis +50°C (14°F bis122°F )
verlängert sorgsamer Umgang die Lebensdauer und den einwandfreien
Luftfeuchtigkeit: 90% oder weniger
D
Betrieb des Gerätes. Vermeiden Sie Stöße oder direkte Schläge auf das
Gerät, um Beschädigungen zu verhindern. Bedienen und lagern Sie das Gerät
Es sollte eine geeignete Spannung entsprechend den Kenndaten des
sachgerecht.
Spannungsversorgungsystems der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
verwendet werden.
Setzen Sie die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) nicht Regen oder
Leistungsaufnahme : 18W
Feuchtigkeit aus und verwenden Sie sie nicht in feuchter Umgebung.
Spannung : 24VAC, 1.5A
Wenn die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit Wasser in Berührung kommt,
schalten Sie sie sofort aus und kontaktieren Sie einen Händler. Feuchtigkeit
kann die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) beschädigen und erhöht die
Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages.
Verwenden Sie keine scharfen oder aggressiven Reinigungsmittel, um
das Gehäuse der SCC-641(P) zu reinigen.
Wenn das Gehäuse der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) verschmutzt ist,
verwenden Sie ein trockenes Tuch, um die Einheit zu reinigen. Verwenden Sie
bei hartnäckigem Schmutz ein mildes Putzmittel und reiben Sie vorsichtig.
2-3
2-4
Vorbereitung der Kabel
Um die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu installieren und in Betrieb zu
Kabelanschlüsse
1. Verbinden Sie ein Ende des BNC-Video-Kabels mit dem Videoausgang (VIDEO
OUT).
2., Verbinden Sie dann das andere Ende mit dem Videoeingang des Monitors.
nehmen, werden folgende Kabel benötigt:
Netzanschlusskabel
Unten abgebildet sehen Sie das Kabel, das mit dem Spannungsversorgungsnetzteil der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) verbunden ist. Die Spannung beträgt 24VAC, die
Stromstärke 1.5A.
D
3.Schließen Sie nun das Netzanschlusskabel an. Verwenden Sie
einenSchraubenzieher, um ein Ende der beiden Leitungen des Netzteils mit dem
Spannungseingang der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) zu verbinden.
Video-Kabel
Das Video-Kabel ist ein BNC-Kabel. Es verbindet den Videoausgang der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit dem Videoeingang des Monitors.
4. Stellen Sie den Schalter am Netzteil auf die verwendete Spannung ein. Stecken Sie
dann den Netzteilstecker in die Steckdose.
5. Verbinden Sie die Fernsteuerung der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) mit der
externen Steuerung.
2-5
2-6
4. [Bild 3, 4] Verbinden Sie die verschiedenen Kabel mit dem Kameraadapter (siehe
Installation der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
Seite 2-6)
1. [Bild 1] Befestigen Sie den Aufbau an der Decke.
(Beachten Sie bei der Installation die Höhe des Aufbaus.)
* Eingebaut vom Hersteller.
D
[Bild 1]
[Bild 3]
[Bild 4]
5. [Bild 5] Stecken Sie den Kameradapter in den Haltewinkel und schrauben Sie ihn mit 4
Befestigungsschrauben (PH M4X8) fest.
Länge des Deckenlochs
2. Machen Sie an der Stelle, wo die Kamera installiert werden soll, ein Loch in die Decke.
(Das Loch sollte etwa einen Durchmesser von 180 mm haben.)
[Bild 5]
3. [Bild 2] Befestigen Sie den Haltewinkel (BRKT-ANCHOR) an der Decke und
schrauben Sie sie mit 4 Schrauben fest.
Haltewinkel
2-7
[Bild 2]
2-8
6. [Bild 6] Stecken Sie passend auf die 3 Löcher an der Rückseite der Kamera das
Verbindungsstück und drehen sie es um etwa 15Grad nach links. (Überprüfen Sie am
Geräusch, ob das Verbindungsteil eingerastet ist und der Hebelverschluss hält.)
* Verwenden Sie Schrauben (BH M3XL8), um die Kamera und den Adapter zu befestigen.
[Bild 6]
Kapitel 3: Überblick über das Setup-Menü
Dieses Kapitel gibt einen Überblick über das Setup-Menü der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P). Zuerst wird die allgemeine Struktur
des Setup-Menüs erläutert und dann die Funktionen der einzelnen
Menüs.
D
7. [Bild7] Bringen Sie die Kuppelabdeckung über der Kuppel an.
[Bild7]
2-9
3-1
Aufbau des Setup Menüs
KAMERA
VIDEO PROG
KAMERA ID
SYNC
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUSGANG
AUS/EIN...
INT/LINIE...
1/2/3/4
AUS/EIN...
VERL/SICHERN/PRESET
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL AUS/EIN...
ALC.../MANU...
AUS/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FEST
AUS/EIN
ATW/AWC/MANU...
POSI/NEGA
+/BIB
EIN.../AUS
SPIEGEL
AUS/EIN
H-DTL
(0)----I-V-DTL
(0)---I--RUE
AF/MF/EINAF
AUS/X2~X10
VERL/SICHERN/PRESET
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
PRESET
POSITIONS PROG
VIDEO PROG
PRESET ID
SCAN
SCHWELLZEIT
AUSGANG
AUTO MODE
AUTO PAN
PATTERN PROG
...
1/2/3
ALARM PROG
ALARM PRIORITÄT PROG
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AUSGANG
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
VERL/SICHERN
ALARM EIN PROG
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AUSGANG
AUS/NO/NC
AUS/NO/NC
AUS/NO/NC
AUS/NO/NC
VERL/SICHERN
ALARM AUS PROG
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AKTIVITAET
AUSGANG
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
VERL/SICHERN
ALARM PATTERN PROG
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AKTIVITAET
AUSGANG
AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
AUS/1~3/HALB1/HALB2/VOLL
VERL/SICHERN
AUX AUS KONTROLLE
AUS1
AUS2
AUS3
AUSGANG
AUS/EIN
AUS/EIN
AUS/EIN
VERL/SICHERN
...
EIN.../AUS
EIN.../AUS
EIN/AUS
1~60S
VERL/SICHERN/LOE
WEITERE PROG
3-2
AC
P.P/T
HOME ZURÜCK
HOME POSITION
AUTO FLIP
KAM RESET
SPRACHE
AUSGANG
D
AUS/6STUNDE/12STUNDE/18STUNDE/24STUNDE
EIN/AUS
AUS/1~60MIN/2~12STUNDE
0~127
AUS/EIN
DEUTSCH
VERL/SICHERN
3-3
Inhalt des KAMERA BLOCK-Menüs
Das Kameramenü besteht aus dem AMERA PROG.Menü und dem VIDEO PROG-Menü.
Das oben gezeichnete Diagramm zeigt die allgemeine Struktur des
(VIDEO PROG)
Setup-Menüs. Im nächsten Abschnitt werden die Merkmale des Setup-Menüs
(KAMERA PROG)
erläutert, die Nutzern eine Anpassung der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
KAMERA ID
SYNC
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUS
INT
3
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
an die persönlichen Bedürfnisse ermöglichen.
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
ALC...
AUS
EIN
ATW
AUS
EINAF
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
KAMERA ID
D
Das KAMERA ID-Menü legt eine Bezeichnung für die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P)
fest, die auf dem Monitor angezeigt wird. Stellen Sie auf dem KAMERA PROG- Menübildschirm KAMERA ID auf ON und drücken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Jetzt sehen Sie das
Untermenü zur Festlegung der ID der Kamera SCC-641(P). Die KAMERA ID kann aus
bis zu 12 alphanumerischen Zeichen bestehen, zuzüglich einiger Sonderzeichen. Die
eingestellte KAMERA ID kann an eine gewünschte Position platziert werden, indem man
das POSITION-Untermenü aufruft.
(KAMERA PROG)
(KAMERA ID)
KAMERA ID
SYNC
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
EIN...
INT
3
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - +
()/
SP
SP
POSITION...
RET
SCC-641P...
“…”bedeutet, es gibt Untermenüs.
3-4
3-5
SYNC
AKTIVITAET
Im SYNC-Menü kann die vertikale Synchronisation
eingestellt werden. Von der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC641(P) unterstütze vertikale Synchronisationssignale sind
der INT-Modus, der durch eine SCC-641(P) interne Uhr
Im AKTIVITAET-Menü können Sie die Bewegungsdetektion einstellen sowie die
(KAMERA PROG)
Empfindlichkeit und den Bereich der Bewegungsdetektion festlegen. Wenn die
KAMERA ID
SYNC
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUS
LINIE...
3
AUS
werden. Wenn die Bewegung registriert wird, wird von der Steuerung ein Alarmsignal
abgegeben.
erzeugt wird, und der LINIE-Modus, der die vertikale
Synchronisation durch die von außen angelegte
Bewegungsdetektion eingeschaltet ist, kann die Bewegung eines Eindringlings registriert
AUSGANG
VERL
Spannungsfrequenz regelt.
Wählen Sie LINIE und drücken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Jetzt erscheint das LINIE LOCK-
(KAMERA PROG)
(AKTIVITAET)
KAMERA ID
SYNC
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUS
INT
3
EIN...
AUSGANG
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
Untermenü, wo Sie die Phase des LINIE LOCK einstellen können. Sie können das
BEREICH
EMPFINDLICH
RUE
PHASE-Menü des LINIE LOCK-Untermenüs verwenden, um beliebige Phasen
einzustellen.
D
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID
SYNC
FARBE S/W
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
PRESET...
MITTEL
Wenn Sie ON wählen und [Enter] drücken, erscheint das AKTIVITAET-Untermenü. Das
(LINIE LOCK)
AUS
LINIE...
FARBE
3
AUS
BEREICH-Menü, das den Bildschirmbereich festlegt, auf den die Bewegungsdetektion
angewendet werden soll, kann auf PRESET oder BENUTZER eingestellt werden. Wenn das
[Enter]
drücken
BEREICHA-Menü auf PRESET gestellt ist, wird die Bewegungsdetektion gemäß der
werkseitig eingestellten Daten der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) ausgeführt. Stellen Sie
AUSGANG
VERL
PHASE ( 000)
RUE
---- I ----
das ABEREICH A-Menü auf BENUTZER und drücken Sie die [Enter]-taste. Nun können Sie
die Größe und Lage des Bereichs, auf den die Bewegungsdetektion angewendet werden soll,
selbst wählen. Wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, können Sie die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten
ZOOM GESCH
verwenden, um die Größe zu verändern und festzulegen. Wenn Sie [Enter] drücken, wenn der
(KAMERA PROG)
Im ZOOM GESCH-Menü können Sie die
Geschwindigkeit des Zooms (Tele/ Weitwinkel)
einzustellen. Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten im
Bereich nicht blinkt, wird er anfangen zu blinken und Sie können mit den
KAMERA ID
SYNC
FARBE S/W
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUS
LINIE...
FARBE
3
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
1: Vergrößerung x22 dauert etwa 17 Sekunden
Taste und die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten um die Position und Größe des
Bewegungsdetektionsbereichs festzulegen. Wenn Sie nochmals [Enter] drücken, verlassen
Sie das BEREICH-Einstellungsmenü. Verwenden Sie das EMPFINOLICH-Menü, um die
ZOOM GESCH-Menü, um die Geschwindigkeit
auszuwählen.
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten die Position des Bereichs festlegen. Verwenden Sie die [Enter]-
Empfindlichkeit der Bewegungsdetektion einzustellen. Je höher der Wert eingestellt wird, desto
empfindlicher ist die Bewegungsdetektion.
geringste Geschwindigkeit
2: Vergrößerung x22 dauert etwa 10 Sekunden
GROESSE
GROESSE
geringe Geschwindigkeit
3: Vergrößerung x22 dauert etwa 6 Sekunden hohe
die [links, rechts, oben,
Geschwindigkeit
unten] Tasten benutzen
4: Vergrößerung x22 dauert etwa 3 Sekunden höchste
Geschwindigkeit.
POSITION
POSITION
Die Bewegungsdetektion arbeitet nicht bei folgenden Einstellungen: niedriger SHUTTER,
PRESET, SCAN, PATTERN MODE oder JOYSTICK.
3-6
3-7
VIDEO PROG-Menü
AUSGANG
Das AUSGANG-Menü wird zum Beenden des KAMERA PROG-Menüs der
Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) und zum Zurückkehren in das Haupt-Menü
BLENDE
Das Video-Ausgangslevel des Monitors kann durch das BLENDE-Objektiv abhängig vom
verwendet.
einfallenden Licht geregelt werden. Das Video-Ausgangslevel kann im ALC-Menü (Auto
- VERL: Ignoriert alle Einstellungsänderungen und stellt die gespeicherten Daten
Light Compensation) eingestellt werden. Das Öffnen und Schließen des Iris-Objektivs
kann im MANU-Menü von Hand eingestellt werden.
wieder her.
- SICHERN: Speichert alle Einstellungsänderungen
- PRESET: Ignoriert alle Einstellungsänderungen und stellt die werkseitig eingestellten
Werte wieder her.
GLK (Untermenü des ALC/MANU-Menüs)
Bei gewöhnlichen Kameras stört starkes Hintergrundlicht die Klarheit der Objekte und
lässt sie dunkel erscheinen. Bei der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) kann das
Problem des Gegenlichts gelöst und ein klares Bild erzeugt werden, wenn man GLK
D
(Back Light Compensation), ein Untermenü des ALC/MANU-Menüs, einstellt.
(KAMERA PROG)
KAMERA ID
SYNC
FARBE S/W
ZOOM GESCH
AKTIVITAET
AUS
LINIE...
FARBE
3
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
ALC
Wählen Sie ALC im BLENDE-Menü und drücken Sie die [Enter]-Taste. Im Untermenü
erscheint nun die Einstellung für das Video-Ausgangslevel und für GLK. Das
Video-Ausgangslevel kann im PEGEL-Item eingestellt werden unter Verwendung der
rechts/links-Tasten. Wenn Sie GLK auf ON einstellen, wird der Gegenlichtausgleich auf
den im BEREICH-Menü festgelegten Bereich angewendet. Der Bildschirmbereich, auf
den der Gegenlichtausgleich angewendet werden soll, kann auf PRESET oder
BENUTZER eingestellt werden. Wenn das BEREICH-Menü auf PRESET eingestellt ist,
wird der Gegenlichtabgleich entsprechend der voreingestellten Werte durchgeführt.
Wenn das BEREICH-Menü auf BENUTZER eingestellt wird und die [Enter]-Taste
gedrückt wird, kann der Nutzer den Bereich für die Anwendung des Gegenlichtabgleichs
selbst bestimmen.
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
(ALC)
ALC...
AUS
EIN
ATW
AUS
EINAF
AUS
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
BEREICH
GLK
PEGEL
RUE
PRESET...
AUS
( 0)---- I ----
Wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, können Sie die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten
verwenden, um die Größe zu verändern und festzulegen. Wenn Sie [Enter] drücken,
wenn der Bereich nicht blinkt, wird er anfangen zu blinken und Sie können mit den
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten die Position des Bereichs festlegen. Verwenden Sie die
[Enter]-Taste und die rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten um die Position und Größe des
Gegenlichtabgleichbereichs festzulegen. Wenn Sie nochmals [Enter] drücken, verlassen
Sie das BEREICH-Einstellungsmenü.
3-8
3-9
GROESSE
GROESSE
(VIDEO PROG)
POSITION
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
die [links, rechts, oben,
unten] Tasten benutzen
POSITION
MANU...
AUS
EIN
ATW
AUS
EINAF
AUS
VERL
MANU
Wenn das BLENDE-Item auf MANU eingestellt wird, erscheint das Untermenü zum
manuellen Öffnen und Schließen der Iris. Mit den rechts/links-Tasten im PEGEL-Item
kann die Iris manuell eingestellt werden.
Wenn Sie die rechts/links-Tasten kontinuierlich drücken, erscheint die Geschwindigkeit in
der folgenden Reihenfolge.
D
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
AUS → 1/100(1/120)→ 1/250 → 1/500 → 1/1000 → 1/2000 →
1/4000 → 1/10K → OFF → AUTOX2 → AUTOX4 → AUTOX6→
AUTOX8 → AUTOX12 → AUTOX16 → AUTOX24 → AUTOX32→
AUTOX48 → AUTOX64 → AUTOX96 → AUTOX128 → AUS→
FEST X2 - FEST X4 → FEST X6 → FEST X8 → FEST X12 → FEST X16 →
FEST X24→ FEST X32 → FEST X48 → FEST X64 → FEST X96 → FEST X128
(MANUEL)
MANU...
AUS
EIN
ATW
AUS
EINAF
AUS
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
PEGEL
RUE
(00) ---- I ----
AGC
Im AGC-Menü (Automatic Gain Control) können Sie eine automatische Verstärkung für
SHUTTER
Im SHUTTER-Menü können der High-Speed-Electric-Shutter, der
AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) sowie der
FEST-Low-Speed-Shutter eingestellt werden. Der High-Speed-Electric-Shutter unterstützt 7
schlechte Beleuchtungsverhältnisse je nach Beleuchtungsbedingungen einstellen. Um
die Verstärkung automatisch zu steuern, stellen Sie das AGC-Menü auf AUS, für
manuelle Steuerung auf EIN. Wenn das SHUTTER-Menü auf AUTO-low-speed-Shutter
eingestellt ist, kann die Einstellung im AGC-Menü nicht verändert werden.
verschiedene Geschwindigkeiten von 1/120 bis 1/10K Sekunde.
Der AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter und der FEST Low-Speed-Shutter unterstützen 12
verschiedene Geschwindigkeiten von Vergrößerungen 2x bis 128x. Der Low-Speed-Shutter
setzt die Shutter-Geschwindigkeit herunter, um ein schwach beleuchtetes Objekt klar zu
sehen. Um die Geschwindigkeit des Shutters automatisch der Helligkeit anzupassen, wählen
Sie den AUTO-Low-Speed-Shutter. Wenn Sie die Geschwindigkeit des Shutters fest
vorgeben wollen, wählen Sie FEST. Die Zahlen hinter AUTO und FEST sind die Anzahl der
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
MANU...
AUS
EIN
ATW
AUS
EINAF
AUS
VERL
gespeicherten Felder. Je größer die Zahl der Felder, desto langsamer ist der Shutter. Ein
ruhiger Bildschirm ist in diesem Fall sehr viel klarer.
Ein bewegtes Objekt dagegen erscheint verschwommen.
3-10
3-11
WEISSABGL
WEISSABGL
Licht wird allgemein in Farbtemperaturen angegeben und in Kelvin-Einheiten
Das WEISSABGL-Menü stellt sicher, dass weißes Licht unter beliebigen
gemessen.(°k).
Farbtemperaturbedingungen auf normal abgeglichen wird. Wenn das WEISSABGL-
Die allgemeine Farbtemperatur von verschiedenen Lichtverhältnissen ist unten
Menü auf ATW Modus eingestellt ist, wird der Weißabgleich automatisch den
Farbtemperaturbedingungen angepasst. Wenn das WEISSABGL-Menü auf den
angegeben.
AWC-Modus eingestellt ist, kann der Weißabgleich entsprechend der Farbtemperatur
einmalig durchgeführt werden, indem man auf die [Enter]-Taste drückt, während man ein
weißes Blatt vor die Kamera hält.
Wenn das WEISSABGL-Menü auf MANU Modus eingestellt ist, kann der Nutzer den
10000。K
9000。K
Weißabgleich der aktuellen Beleuchtungssituation anpassen.
blauer Himmel
D
regnerisch
- 3200 °K : Farbtemperatur auf 3200 °K
- 5600 °K : Farbtemperatur auf 5600 °K
8000。K
- BENUTZER: Nutzer: Einstellen des geeigneten Wertes im Rot und Blau-Diagramm
bewölkt
MANU: Wählen Sie das MANU-Item und drücken Sie die [Enter]-Taste, um
7000。K
dasUntermenü anzuzeigen, in dem der manuelle Weißabgleich eingestellt
werden kann. Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten um 3200°K, 5600°K oder
6000。K
5000。K
teils bewölkt
den BENUTZER-Modus im PRESET-Menü auszuwählen.
sonnig
(AWB/MANUEL)
(VIDEO PROG)
4000。K
Leuchtstofflampenlicht
3000。K
Halogenlampenlicht
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
ALC...
AUS
EIN
MANU...
AUS
EINAF
AUS
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
PRESET AUS(BENUTZER)..
ROT ( 00)
---- I ---BLAU ( 00)
---- I ---RUE
2000。K
Glühbirnenlicht
Kerzenlicht
1000。K
3-12
3-13
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
Im SPEZIAL-Menü können POSI/NEGA, BIB, Mirror und H-DTL und V-DTL festgelegt
Im AUTO-FOKUS-Menü kann die Fokussierung auf AF, MF oder EINAF eingestellt werden.
- AF: Mit dem AUTO FOKUS-Modus kann kontinuierlich aufgenommen und automatisch
fokussiert werden. Eine manuelle Focus-Einstellung ist nicht erforderlich.
- MF: Im MANUAL FOKUS-Modus kann der Nutzer den Fokus manuell einstellen.
- EINAF: Im OEINAF-Modus der Speed-Dome Kamera SCC-641(P) arbeitet derAutofokus
nur während des Bewegens/Anhaltens. Wenn sich die Speed-Dome Kamera SCC641(P) nicht bewegt, entspricht die Einstellung dem MF-Modus. Wenn sie sich
bewegt/anhält, entspricht die Einstellung dem AF-Modus.
werden.
- POSI/NEGA: Das Video-Signal wird normal/ungekehrt ausgegeben.
- BIB (Picture in Picture): Wenn der Digitale Zoom aktiviert ist, wird der auf 1/16tel
reduzierte Bildschirm angezeigt.
- SPIEGEL: Umkehrung des Video-Ausgangssignals
- H-DTL (Horizontal Detail Level)
Verwenden Sie die links/rechts-Tasten, um AF, MF oder EINAF im AUTO FOKUS-Menü
auszuwählen.
- V-DTL (Vertikal Detail Level)
Wählen Sie EIN und drücken Sie [Enter], um das SPEZIAL-Untermenü mit den
D
Spezialfunktionen aufzurufen.
(VIDEO PROG)
(VIDEO PROG)
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
(SPEZIAL)
ALC...
OFF
EIN
ATW
EIN...
EINAF
AUS
VERL
[Enter]
drücken
POSI/NEGA
BIB
SPIEGEL
H-DTL
V-DTL
RUE
+/AUS
AUS
( 0)---- I -( 0)--- I ---
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
ALC...
OFF
EIN
ATW
EIN...
EINAF
AUS
VERL
D-ZOOM
Im D-ZOOM-Menü können Sie die digitale Zoom-Vergrößerung einstellen.
Um die Funktionen auszuwählen verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten und wählen
Sie können eine Vergrößerung von AUS bis 10fach wählen.
ein Item aus. Wählen Sie BIB-Menü ON und drücken Sie [Enter]. Verwenden Sie die
Wenn das digitale Zoom auf 10fach eingestellt ist, ergibt sich zusammen mit dem Zoom-
rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten, um die Position des BIB festzulegen.
Objektiv eine Vergrößerung von bis zu 220fach.
Verwenden Sie die rechts/links-Tasten, um die Vergrößerung im D-ZOOM-Menü
※ BIB arbeitet nicht im low-speed-Shutter-Modus. Wenn Mirror eingestellt ist, wirkt es
auszuwählen.
sich nicht im BIB-Fenster aus.
(VIDEO PROG)
(SPEZIAL)
POSI/NEGA
BIB
SPIEGEL
H-DTL
V-DTL
RUE
+/EIN...
AUS
( 0)---- I ---( 0)---- I ----
[Enter]
drücken
BIB Screen
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
(VIDEO PROG)
ALC...
OFF
EIN
ATW
EIN...
EINAF
AUS
VERL
BLENDE
SHUTTER
AGC
WEISSABGL
SPEZIAL
AUTO FOKUS
D-ZOOM
AUSGANG
ALC...
OFF
EIN
ATW
EIN...
EINAF
X10
VERL
AUSGANG
Wie AUSGANG-Funktion im KAMERA Menü.
3-14
3-15
PRESET
Insgesamt sind 128 Voreinstellungen zugänglich einschließlich der Auswahl von
PAN/TILT-Einstellung, Zoom/Fokus und Bildschirm- und Aufnahmeeinstellungen.
(0~127)
POSITIONS PROG
PRESET NR.0
Drücken Sie ausgehend von “POSITIONS PROG ...”
S/N PROG
ZOOM FOKUS PROG
die [Enter]-Taste, um in das Menü zur Einstellung von S/N
und ZOOM/FOKUS zu gelangen. Drücken Sie [Enter], um in
Unter den 128 Voreinstellungen :
das nächsthöhere Menü zu gelangen.
PRESET 0 : HOME POSITION (Ausgangsposition), PRESET 1 : ALARM 1, PRESET 2
: ALARM 2, PRESET 3 : ALARM 3, PRESET 4 : ALARM 4, PRESET 5 : Satz
VIDEO PROG
voreingestellter Daten für MOTION.
Dies ist die Bildschirmeinstellung für jedes PRESET. Schauen Sie bei den Erklärungen
im VIDEO PROG-Menü nach.
(PRESET KARTE)
* * HAUPTEMENÜ * *
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
[Enter]
drücken
0 H 1
2
5
6
7
10
11
12
15
16
17
20
21
22
25
26 27
30
31
î
ID:PRESET 0
3
4
8
9
13
14
18
19
23
24
28
29
ï RUE
PRESET ID
PRESET NR.0 ID
Dies ist die Funktion zur Einstellung der ID für jedes
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:! - + * ()/
SP ï î SP
POSITION...
RUE
PRESET 0....
PRESET. Es kann mit 12 Zeichen eingestellt werden
unter Verwendung der rechts/links/oben/unten-Tasten.
Die ID-Positionierung kann im Untermenü “POSITION”
festgelegt werden.
D
PRESET NR.0
SCAN
PRESET NR.0
Diese Funktion stellt eine SCAN-Bewegung ein oder
[Enter]
drücken
POSITIONS PROG
VIDEO PROG
PRESET ID
SCAN
SCHWELLZEIT
...
AUS
EIN...
EIN
2 S
aus.
Wenn SCAN auf EIN gestellt ist, wird eine
POSITIONS PROG...
VIDEO PROG
AUS
PRESET ID
EIN...
SCAN
EIN
SCHWELLZEIT
2 S
AUSGANG
VERL
SCAN-Bewegung ausgeführt, bei AUS nicht.
AUSGANG
VERL
SCHWELLZEIT
Diese Funktion stellt die Verweildauer bei der PRESET-Position während der
SCAN-Bewegung ein. Die Verweildauer kann von 1 bis 60 sec eingestellt werden.
AUSGANG
“UERL” : Speichert die Einstellungen nicht und führt zum höheren Menü zurück.
“SICHERN” : Speichert die Einstellungen und führt zum höheren Menü zurück.
“LOE” : Löscht die Einstellungen und stellt die DEFAULT-Werte wieder her. Es führt
dann zum höheren Menü zurück.
3-16
3-17
AUTO MODE
ENDE PROG
Der AUTO-Modus enthält die Funktionen AUTO PAN und PATTERN.
PROG ENDE!
Über “ENDE PROG…” und Drücken der Enter-Taste
AUTO PAN
Nach Auswahl zweier Positionen (S/N) für Start und Ziel wird ein kontinuierlicher
gelangen Sie in das ENDE PROG-Einstellungs-Menü.
Stellen Sie die S/N Position ein und drücken Sie
Schwenk in der angegebenen Geschwindigkeit gefahren.
[Enter], um zum höheren Menü zurückzukehren.
RICHTUNG
(AUTO MODE)
* * HAUPTEMENÜ * *
Bestimmen Sie die Bewegungsrichtung von START bis ENDE (PAN location standard).
KAMERA...
VIDEO VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
[Enter]
drücken
AUTO PAN
PATTERN PROG
...
1...
“rechts”:
“links”:
D
RUE
AUTO PAN
[Enter]
drücken
START PROG
ENDE PROG
RICHTUNG
ENDLOS
GESCHWINDIGK
SCHWELLZEIT
...
...
LINKS
OFF
SCHRITT20
2 S
AUSGANG
VERL
ENDLOS
Dies ist die Funktion für eine 360o-Drehung, die nur für die eingestellte Verweildauer
(SCHWELL ZEIT) in der START- und ENDE-Position anhält.
START PROG
Ausgehend von “START PROG...“ gelangen Sie durch
Drücken der [Enter]-Taste in das
PROG START!
GESCHWINDIGK
Hier wird die Bewegungsgeschwindigkeit eingestellt. Sie kann von Stufe 1 bis 64 gewählt
werden.
START PROG-Einstellungs-Menü. Nach Auswahl der
3-18
Position für S/N, drücken Sie die Enter-Taste, um zum
SCHWELLZEIT
höheren Menü zurückzukehren.
Hier wird die Verweildauer an der START- und ENDE-Position eingestellt.
3-19
PATTERN
ALARM PROG
Dies ist eine Wiederholungsfunktion, mit der die MANUAL-Funktionen wie S/N,
Zur Verfügung stehen 4 ALARM ENTs und 3 ALARM AUSs. Das Gerät kann einen
ZOOM und FOKUS für 30 Sekunden aufgezeichnet werden.
Alarminput von einem externen Sensor empfangen oder im Rahmen der PRESET oder
PATTERN-Funktion ein Alarmsignal geben.
Es erkennt das ankommende Alarmsignal als ein Alarmsignal, wenn es länger als 150
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
ms andauert. Der Zeitpunkt für die Auslösung des Alarms hängt von der Einstellung der
(AUTO MODE)
* * HAUPTEMENÜ * *
[Enter]
drücken
AUTO PAN
PATTERN PROG
...
1...
Verweildauer (SCHWELLZEIT) im PRESET und PATTERN-Modus ab.
(ALARM PROG)
* * HAUPTEMENÜ * *
RUE
KAMERA...
VIDEO PROG...
PRESET...
AUTO MODE...
ALARM PROG...
WEITERE PROG...
[Enter]
drücken
ALARM PRIORITÄT PROG..
ALARM EIN PROG..
ALARM AUS PROG..
ALARM PATTERN PROG..
AUX AUS KONTROLLE..
D
RUE
PATTERN1 PROG
ALARM PRIORITÄT PROG
[Enter]
drücken
Legt die Priorität der 4 Alarminputs fest. Die voreingestellte
Priorität ist:
ALARM PRIORITÄT
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
1
2
3
4
AUSGANG
VERL
ALARM 1: 1, ALARM 2: 2, ALARM 3: 3, ALARM 4: 4.
Wenn zwei ALARM-Signale gleicher Priorität gleichzeitig
angesprochen werden, gilt die voreingestellte Priorität.
Während der ALARM läuft wird keine Bewegung detektiert.
PATTERN kann auf 1 bis 3 gesetzt werden. Wählen Sie 1, 2 oder 3 mit der rechten
oder linken Taste im PATTERN PROG aus und drücken Sie [ENTER], um in das
Einstellungsmenü zu gelangen. Von dem Zeitpunkt an, wenn PATTERN 1 PROG
eingestellt ist, werden die manuellen Bewegungen innerhalb der nächsten 30
Sekunden gespeichert. Nach Ablauf der 30 Sekunden gelangt man wieder ins höhere
ALARM ENT PROG
Menü. Wenn die Einstellung vor Ablauf der 30 Sekunden beendet werden soll, drücken
Stellen Sie den TYPE auf “NO” (Normal Open),
Sie die [ENTER]-Taste.
“NC”(Normal Close) oder “AUS” entsprechend den
ALARM EIN
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
Merkmale des angeschlossenen SENSORS.
3-20
3-21
ALARM AUS PROG
Jeder Alarminput entspricht einem der 3
Alarmoutputs. <Alarm 3 ist reserviert für das Relais
OUT>.
WEITERE PROG
ALARM AUS
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AKTIVITAET
1
2
3
1
2
AUSGANG
VERL
AC(AUTOKALIBRIERUNG)
Die Auto Kalibrierung EIN/AUS Funktion. SCC-C641(P) hat eine Auto Kalibrierung
Funktion, um die Genauigkeitsgrad von OBJEKTIV und PAN/TILT zu verbessern.
Wenn keine Benutzers Taste während der bestimmten Zeit, die von Benutzer eingestellt
worden ist, eingegeben wird, wird das Zeichen‚ A.C. auf dem Schirm angezeigt, und die
ALARM PATTERN PROG
Initialisierung des OBJEKTIVS und des PAN /TILT wird automatisch durchgeführt.
Hier werden PATTERN-Bewegungen bei Alarminputs
P.P/T(PROPORTIONAL PAN/TILT)
festgelegt.Wenn ALARM eingegeben ist, besteht
Es ist eine Funktion, die bei der MANUELL PAN/TILT Operation je nach
folgende Beziehung:ALARM 1 ist Input für PRESET 1
ALARM 2 ist Input für PRESET 2 ALARM 3 ist Input für
PRESET 3ALARM 4 ist Input für PRESET 4und
AKTIVITAET ist Input für PRESET 5.Wenn der ALARM
ALARM PATTERN
ALARM1
ALARM2
ALARM3
ALARM4
AKTIVITAET
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
der ZOOM Vergrößerung automatisch die PAN/TILT Geschwindigkeit
ändert. Wenn PROPORTIONAL P/T als ON eingestellt wird, wird sich im
D
ZOOM WIDE schnell und im ZOOM TELE langsam bewegt, obwohl es
gleiche MANUELLE Operation ist.
durchgeführt wird, bleibt die Kamera in der dem Alarm
entsprechenden PRESET-Position für die Verweildauer
HOME ZURÜCK
(SCHWELLZEIT) und geht dann in die dem ALARM
Wenn keine Eingabe oder keine Veränderungen für eine gewisse Zeit erfolgen, kehrt die
zugeordnete PATTERN-Bewegung über.
Kamera automatisch in ihre Ausgangsposition zurück.
Die HOME-Position kann vom Menü HOME POSITION aus zugewiesen werden.
OFF im Setup-Menü bedeutet, das PATTERN wir nicht ausgeführt. Die anderen
EINSTELLUNG DER ZEIT FÜR DEN HOME ZURÜCK:
Einstellungen bedeuten →PATTERN1,2 →PATTERN2,3→ PATTERN3,
kontinuierliche Bewegung von HALF1→PATTERN1+PATTERN2,motion continue de
AUS: Ausschalten der HOME ZURÜCK-Funktion
HALB2→PATTERN2+PATTERN3und kontinuierliche Bewegung von VOLL→
AUS ➞ 1 MIN ➞ 2 MIN ➞ 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ➞ ~12STUNDE
PATTERN1+PATTERN2+PATTERN3 .
HOME POSITION
AUX AUS KONTROLLE
Sie können die HOME POSITION unter den voreingestellten Positionen mit den
Nummern 0 bis 127 auswählen.
Diese Einstellung bestimmt, ob die
ALARM AUS-Funktion dauerhaft arbeitet oder nur dann,
wenn der ALARM eingestellt ist.Wenn die Einstellung
AUX AUS KONTROLLE
AUS1
AUS2
AUS3
AUS
AUS
AUS
AUTO FLIP
Wenn die Neigung der Kamera bei Verwendung des Joysticks die 90°-Grenze erreicht,
AUS gewählt wird erfolgt die Abgabe des Alarmsignals
schwenkt die Kamera automatisch um 180° und zeigt den gegenüberliegenden Bereich.
nur, wenn der ALARM aktiv ist (Active “Low”). Wenn die
Dies entspricht dem Effekt einer Ausdehnung des Neigungswinkels auf einen Bereich
Einstellung EIN gewählt wird, arbeitet ALARM AUS
AUSGANG
VERL
von 180°.
immer, unabhängig von der ALARM-Einstellung.
3-22
3-23
KAM RESET
Mit KAM RESET werden alle bisher vorgenommenen Einstellungen gelöscht und die
werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen wiederhergestellt.
Bei Auswahl von KAM RESET erscheint die Meldung "KAMERA RESET?".
Wählen Sie BE ENDEN, um zum Bildschirmmenü zurückzukehren, oder OK, um die
werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen wiederherzustellen.
●
Seien Sie mit der Durchführung von KAM RESET vorsichtig, da dadurch alle
Einstellungen gelöscht werden.
Technische Daten
SCC-641
NO
Artikel
1
Produkttyp
2
Spannungsversorgung
3
Leistungsaufnahme
4
Signalsystem
5
Bildwandler
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Effektive Bildelemente
- 768(H) x 494(V)
7
Abtastmodus
8
Abtastrate
9
Synchronisationsmodus
Spezifikation
- Ein Körper-Kombi-Kuppelkamera mit Zoomobjektiv
- AC 24± 10% (60Hz± 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- NTSC Standard Farbsystem
- 525 Zeilen, 2:1 Interlace
- Horizontal : 15, 734 Hz(INT) / 15, 750 Hz(L/L)
Vertical : 59.94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
D
- INT/LINIE LOCK
10
Auflösung
11
Signal/Rauschabstand
12
Min. Lichtstarke des Ohjekts
13
Farbtemperatur
- ATW/AWC oder manuell
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B GAIN Court)
14
Ausgangssignal
- Videoausgang: 1.0Vp-p, 75Ohm/BNC gemischt
- 480 TV LINES
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Sense UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
3-24
- Ein Körper: 22x Zoomobjektiv
- Brennweite: 3.6 bis 79.2mm
- Apertur: F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Autofokus
15
Objektiv
16
PAN Funktion
- PAN Reichweite: 360° ohne Begrenzung
- Voreingestellte PAN Geschwindigkeit: Max. 240°/sec
- Manuelle PAN Geschwindigkeit:0.8° bis 90°/sec (64 Stufen)
17
TILT Funktion
- TILT-Reichweite: 0° bis 90°
- Voreingestellte TILT Geschwindigkeit: Max. 150°/sec
- Manuelle TILT Geschwindigkeit: 0.8° bis 45°/sec (64Stufen)
18
REMOTE CONTROL
19
ALARM
20
Operation Temperature
21
Operation Humidity
22
SIZE
23
Weight
- Tele/Weitwinckel (Zoom), Nah/Fern (Fokus)
Blende Open/Close, S/N
- Alarmeingang: 4 IN (5mA Sink)
- Alarmausgang: 3 OUT (Open Collector: 2 DC24V 40mA
Max, Relay: 1, NO, NC, COM 2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC
Max
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- Max. 90%
- Kuppel : 147 (ø),
Gehäuseumfang: 159.5( ø) x176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-25
Technische Daten
SCC-641P
Achtung
NO
Artikel
1
Produkttyp
2
Spannungsversorgung
3
Leistungsaufnahme
4
Signalsystem
Spezifikation
- Ein Körper-Kombi-Kuppelkamera mit Zoomobjektiv
- AC 24± 10% (50Hz± 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- PAL Standard Farbsystem
5
Bildwandler
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Effektive Bildelemente
- 752(H) x 582(V)
7
Abtastmodus
8
Abtastrate
9
Synchronisationsmodus
- 625 Zeilen,, 2:1 Interlace
• Das Urheberrecht dieses Handbuchs gehört Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd.
• Ohne vorherige Genehmigung von Samsung Electronics darf es weder
elektronisch, mechanisch, hörbar noch durch eine andere Methode
vervielfältigt werden.
• Dieses Handbuch wird bei Produktverbesserungen geändert.
- Horizontal : 15, 625 Hz(INT) / 15, 625 Hz(L/L)
Vertical : 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
D
- INT/LINIE LOCK
- 480 TV LINES
10
Auflösung
11
Signal/Rauschabstand
12
Min. Lichtstarke des Ohjekts
13
Farbtemperatur
- ATW/AWC oder manuell
(3200°K, 5600°K, R/B GAIN Court)
14
Ausgangssignal
- Videoausgang: 1.0Vp-p, 75Ohm/BNC gemischt
- 52dB (AGC OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Sense UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
3-26
- Ein Körper: 22x Zoomobjektiv
- Brennweite: 3.6 bis 79.2mm
- Apertur: F1.6(Wide), F3.8(Tele)
- Autofokus
15
Objektiv
16
PAN Funktion
- PAN Reichweite: 360° ohne Begrenzung
- Voreingestellte PAN Geschwindigkeit: Max. 240°/sec
- Manuelle PAN Geschwindigkeit:0.8° bis 90°/sec (64 Stufen)
17
TILT Funktion
- TILT-Reichweite: 0° bis 90°
- Voreingestellte TILT Geschwindigkeit: Max. 150°/sec
- Manuelle TILT Geschwindigkeit: 0.8° bis 45°/sec (64Stufen)
18
REMOTE CONTROL
19
ALARM
20
Operation Temperature
21
Operation Humidity
22
SIZE
23
Weight
- Tele/Weitwinckel (Zoom), Nah/Fern (Fokus)
Blende Open/Close, S/N
- Alarmeingang: 4 IN (5mA Sink)
- Alarmausgang: 3 OUT (Open Collector: 2 DC24V 40mA
Max, Relay: 1, NO, NC, COM 2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC
Max
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- Max. 90%
- Kuppel : 147 (ø),
Gehäuseumfang: 159.5(ø) x176(H)(Adapter:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-27
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Manuel d’instruction
F
Précautions de sécurité
L’objectif des précautions de sécurité est d’assurer l’utilisation correcte de ce
produit afin d’éloigner tout risque et tout dégât à la propriété. Assurez-vous
de bien observer toutes les précautions.
* La section des précautions de sécurité est répartie en deux volets, soit
“Avertissements” et “Mises en garde”, comme indiqué ci-dessous:
Avertissement: Ne pas tenir compte d’un avertissement risque de causer
des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
Mise en garde: Ne pas tenir compte d’une mise en garde peut entraîner
des blessures corporelles ou des dégâts à la propriété.
Les avertissements vous
signalent des risques
susceptibles de causer des
blessures ou la mort.
Les mises en garde vous signalent
des risques susceptibles de causer
des blessures ou des dégâts à la
propriété.
Avertissement
1. Assurez-vous d’utiliser uniquement l’adaptateur fourni avec le produit.
(L’utilisation d’un adaptateur autre que celui fourni peut endommager le
produit ou causer un incendie ou des décharges électriques.)
2. Avant de brancher le cordon d’alimentation et les câbles de signal, vérifiez
d’abord les bornes extérieures. Reliez les câbles des signaux d’alarme à
leur borne respective. Branchez l’adaptateur CA sur la prise CA et
l’adaptateur CC sur la prise CC tout en tenant compte de la bonne polarité.
(La connexion incorrecte à la source d’alimentation peut endommager le
produit ou causer un incendie ou des décharges électriques.)
3. Ne branchez jamais plus d’une camera sur un seul adaptateur.
(Le dépassement de la capacité de charge risque de générer une chaleur
anormale au point de causer un incendie.)
(La chute de la camera peut causer des blessures corporelles.)
4. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation sur la prise murale. Assurez-vous que la
connexion est solidement fixée.
(Une mauvaise connexion peut constituer le risque d’un incendie.)
5. Lorsque vous installez la camera au mur ou au plafond, assurez-vous
qu’elle soit y fixée solidement et de façon sécuritaire. (La chute de la
camera peut causer des blessures corporelles.)
6. Ne placez jamais d’objets conducteurs (p. ex., un tournevis, des pièces de
monnaie, des objets métalliques) ni de contenants d’eau sur la camera.
(Cela pourrait causer des blessures corporelles en raison d’un incendie, d’une
décharge électrique ou de la chute d’un objet.)
7. N’installez pas la camera dans un emplacement plein de suie, de poussière ou
d’humidité. (Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une décharge électrique.)
8. Si la camera dégage une odeur étrange ou de la fumée, débranchez
immédiatement le cordon d’alimentation et contactez le centre de soutien
technique. (Une sollicitation continue de l’appareil dans ces conditions pourrait
provoquer un incendie ou des décharges électriques.)
9. Si ce produit cesse de fonctionner correctement, communiquez avec votre
revendeur ou le centre d’entretien de votre localité. Ne démontez ni ne modifiez
jamais ce produit. (Samsung ne saurait être tenue pour responsable des
problèmes techniques découlant d’une modification ou d’une tentative de
réparation non autorisées.)
10. Lorsque vous nettoyez le produit, veillez à ne pas vaporiser d’eau directement
sur les composants du produit.
(Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une décharge électrique.)
Nettoyez la surface au moyen d'un chiffon doux. N’utilisez jamais de
détersifs ni de nettoyants chimiques. Cela pourrait décolorer le produit ou
endommager son fini.
Mise en garde
1. Ne laissez pas tomber d’objets sur le produit ni ne le soumettez à de forts
coups. N’installez pas le produit dans un endroit où il pourrait subir de
fortes vibrations ou des interférences magnétiques.
2. N’installez pas le produit dans un endroit où il fait très chaud (plus de
50°C/122°F), très froid (moins de –10 °C/14 °F) ou très humide.
(Cela pourrait provoquer un incendie ou une décharge électrique.)
3. Évitez les endroits où le produit est exposé à des rayons directs du soleil
ou à une source de chaleur, telle qu’un radiateur ou un appareil de
chauffage.
(Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait présenter un risque d’incendie.)
4. Si vous désirez changer d’endroit d’installation de la camera, assurez-vous
de couper le courant avant de procéder au démontage et à la réinstallation.
5. Installez le produit dans une aire bien ventilée.
6. En cas d’orage, débranchez le cordon électrique de la prise murale.
(Le non-respect de cette précaution pourrait provoquer un incendie ou
endommager le produit.)
F
Avant l’utilisation
Homologation des normes
C’est un mode d’emploi de base pour l’utilisateur de SCC-641(P).
Il contient toutes les instructions nécessaires pour employer le
SCC-641(P) d’une introduction simple de la location de contrôle et
fonctions de SCC-641(P) pour méthodes d ‘installation dans le menu
d’installation.
Nous recommandons à tous les utlisateurs de SCC-641(P) de
l’utilisateur avancé qui a employé la camera semblable auparavant à
l’utilisateur général de lire le mode d’emploi avant utilisation.
La particularité le plus fréquemment employée dans SCC-641(P)
serait le Menu d’installation de SCC-641(P).
Le Menu d’installation de SCC-641(P) est exprimé en détail dans le
chapitre 3 “Vue d’ensemble de Menu d’installation”.
Ce manuel d’instruction est le meilleur employé quand on lit du début
jusqu’à la fin, mais pour les utilisateurs voulant lire seulement la
partie ils ont besoin ici est le chapitre Résumés.
F
Cet équipement a été évalué et trouvé à observer les limites pour une classe B le dispositif
digital,conformément à partie 15 des règles FCC. Ces limites sont conçues pour fournir la
protection résonnable contre l’interface nuisible dans une installation résidentielle.Cet
équipement produit,utilise et peut mettre l’énergie de fréquence radio et si non installé et
employé conformément à des instructions, peut causer l’interférence nuisible aux
communications de radio.
Cependant,il n’y a aucune garantie que cette interférence n’arrivera pas dans une installation
particulière. Si cet équipement cause l’interférence nuisible à la radio ou la réception de
télévision, qui peut être décidé en tournant l’équipement en ON et OFF, l’utilisateur est
encouragé pour essayer de corriger l’interférence par une ouplus des mesures suivantes.
“Chapitre 1. Vue d’ensemble” inclut une introduction brève de
SCC-641(P), noms de partie et fonctions et Arrangement de
commutation.
- Réorientez-vous de transférer l’antenne de réception.
- Augmentez la séparation entre l’équipement et le récepteur.
- Joignez l’équipement dans une sortie sur le circuit différent de cela auquel le récepteur
est connecté.
- Consultez le revendeur ou un technicien de TV de radio expérimenté pour l’aide.
“Chapitre 2. SCC-641(P) Installation” explique les procédures
d’installation de SCC-641(P) et fournit préparation et exigences
d’environnement d’installation
“Chapitre 3. Vue d’ensemble de menu d’installation” présente la
structure du menu d’installation pour le SCC-641(P) incluant une
explication détaillée des fonctions exécutées dans chaque sous-menu.
“Annexe SCC-641(P) Spécifications de produit” contient
spécifications du produit SCC-641(P) dans les catégories détaillées.
1-1
1-2
" Table des matières "
3-10
- CAG
3-11
Avant l’utilisation
1-1
- BAL BLANCS
3-12
Chapitre 1
SCC-641(P) Vue d’ensemble
1-5
- SPECIAL
3-14
SCC-641(P) Introduction
1-6
- AUTO FOCUS
3-15
SCC-641(P) location de commandes
1-7
- D-ZOOM
3-15
Contrôles de location- avant
1-7
- SORITIE
3-15
Contrôles de location-arrière
1-8
PRESET
3-16
Connexion d’adaptateur
1-9
MODE AUTO
3-18
Arrangement initial
1-10
- PAN AUTO
3-18
Arrangement de RS-422A RS 485 d’une terminaison
1-11
- RONDE
3-20
Arrangement de commutateur
1-12
PROG ALARME
3-21
SCC-641(P) Installations
2-1
AUTRE PROG
3-23
Vérification de contenu de paquet
2-2
Précautions pour installation et utilisation
2-3
Préparation du câble
2-5
Connexion du câble
2-6
Installation de SCC-641(P)
2-7
Vue d’ensemble de menu d’installation
3-1
Contenu de menu d’installation
3-2
La structure générale de menu de caméra bloc
3-5
- Caméra ID
3-5
- Sync
3-6
- VITE ZOOM
3-6
- DET MOUVE
3-7
- SORITIE
3-8
MENU DE PROG VIDEO
3-9
- IRIS
3-9
Chapitre2
Chapitre3
1-3
- SHUTTER
Annexe Spécifications du produit
F
3-25
1-4
Chapitre 1 SCC-641(P) vue d’ensemble
Dans ce chapitre nous introduisons brièvement SCC-641(P)
et montrerons fonctions principales,contrôle de Location et
arrangement de commutateur.
SCC-641(P) Introduction
Le SCC-641(P) est le produit que la meilleure exécution de lentille de zoom a
interrâpé la caméra de surveillance.
Le SCC-641(P) est la caméra de surveillance de haute qualité utilisant la
lentille de zoom x22 et zoom digital IC,il peut attraper des images claires
jusqu’à 220 fois.
F
Le SCC-641(P) a fonction de lumière basse qui permet de prendre des
décharges dans l’environnement où il n’y a presque aucune lumière,Fonction
d’équilibre blanc qui corrige l’image naturelle selon les feux de fond,Fonction
de compensation de Rétro-éclairage qui permet des objets d’être vu
clairement même sous contexte brillant éclairage conditions et Fonction de
Auto Focus qui le permet de se concentrer selon le mouvement de l’objet. Il
est la caméra de malfonction qui a toutes les fonctions importantes d’autres
caméras de surveillance.
Le SCC-641(P) utilise la fonction d’alarme pour alerter situations et caméra
mouvant dans la direction que vous voulez,Fonctions de zoom-in et
zoom-out peuvent être contrôlées à distance.
1-5
1-6
Connexion d’adaptateur
Arrière
Avant
F
1-7
1-8
Connexion d’adaptateur
Arrangement de commutateur
Installation d’adresse de camera
Dip Switch setting est même comme l’exemple suivant.
EX) CAMERA ADDR : quand il est le nombre 1, mettez comme suit.
1
SCC-641(P) Adapter BOARD
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
SW500
Arrangement de protocole de communication.
Utilisez les nombres 5-8 PIN de SW501 pour mettre Protocole de communication.
PIN
Comp
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
F
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
G
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) HALF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) MAXIMUM
F
H
ON
ON
ON
I
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
J
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
K
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
L
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SW500
M
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW501
N
ON
OFF
ON
ON
O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEE
INSTRUCTIN MANUAL
REPORTEZ-VOUS
AU
GUIDE D’UTILISATION
(VUE DE DESSOUS)
Configuration du débit en bauds
Utilisez les BROCHES 3 et 4 du SW501.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
PIN 3
PIN 4
4800 BPS
ON
ON
9600 BPS
OFF
ON
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
38400 BPS
OFF
OFF
BAUD RATE
1-9
1-10
Arrangement de RS-422A/ RS-485 d’une terminaison
Arrangement de commutateur
Comme on le montre dans la carte de structure,quand le contrôleur est joint, il doit être
terminé selon la particularité de câble d’impédence sur chaque fin de la ligne de
transmission pour transférer les signaux dans la longue distance en contrôlant la
réflexion des signaux au plus bas.
n < 128
Division
Terminaison
SW1-ON
<Organisation de Moitié Duplex RS485>
Terminaison : en utilisant les numéros 1 et 2 PIN, tournez à ON et il sera terminé.
n < 128
Division
<Organisation de Plein Duplex RS-422A/RS-485>
Si plus qu’une caméra est mis de même d’adresse,l’erreur de
Caution
1-11
communication peut être arrivée.
Division
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
Adresse de récepteur
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-12
F
Adresse de récepteur
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1-13
SW500-1 SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7 SW500-8
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Adresse de récepteur
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
F
1-14
Adresse de récepteur
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
1-15
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Adresse de récepteur
SW500-1
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7 SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
F
1-16
Avant l’installation
Chapitre 2 SCC-641(P) Installation
Dans ce chapitre nous regarderons sur les points de contrôle avant
l’installation, installation exigences environnements, et précautions
pendant l’installation du SCC-641(P).Après cela,nous montrerons
l’installation réelle du SCC-641(P) et connexions de câble.
Vérification de contenu de paquet
Vérifiez s’il vous plaît que tous les composants inscrits ci-dessous sont inclus dans le
paquet.
F
SCC-641(P)
Ancre de parenthèse
Manueld’instruction
Corps de couverturea
2-1
Détenteur de caméra
2-2
Précautions pour installation et utilisation.
Ne faites jamais à SCC-641(P) vers le soleil.
Si le SCC-641(P) est dans l’utilisation ou non,ne faites jamais face à
N’essayez pas de démonter le SCC-641(P)
SCC-641(P) vers le soleil.Utilisez avec précaution en faisant fonctionner le
Il y a un danger de décharge électrique si les vis ou la couverture sont
SCC-641(P) aux alentours de rayons de projecteur ou d’autres feux brillants
enlevés.Nous recommendons aux utilisateurs d’éviter de traiter la partie
et lumière reflétant l’objet.
intérieure.Si cela devient nécessaire pour inspecter l’intérieur ,entrez s’il vous
plaît en contact avec un distributeur.
Le SCC-641(P) doit être fonctionné dans un environnement stable.Des
conditions de fonctionnement acceptables sont inscrites ci-dessous.
Traitez-le SCC-641(P) avec soin.
Bien que le SCC-641(P) soit le produit durable,le traitement soigneux du
Température : -10°C ~ +50°C(14°F~ 122°F)
Niveau d’humidité :90% ou moins
produit allongera sa durée de service et empêche des échecs.Evitez de
trembler ou directement impact de la caméra pour empêcher dégâts au produit
L’énergie électrique appropriée doit être employée selon les
et traiter et garder correctement.
spécifications de SCC-641(P) système d’alimentation d’énergie.
F
Energie consommée :18W
N’exposez pas le SCC-641(P) à la pluie ou à l’humidité ou ne faites pas
ntrée électrique :24VAC,1.5A
fonctionner en place humide.
Si le SCC-641(P) vient contact avec l’eau ,éteignez-vous le commutateur
électrique immédiatement et entrez en contact avec un distributeur.L’humidité
peut endommager le SCC-641(P) et augmenter le danger de décharge
électrique.
N’employez pas de détergents forts ou détergents abrasifs pour nettoyer
le corps de SCC-641(P).
Si le SCC-641(P) devient sale, utilisez le tissu sec pour nettoyer l’unité.
Dans le cas où la saleté est dure d’enlever, employez un détergent doux et
essuyez doucement.
2-3
2-4
Préparation des câbles
Pour installer et utliser le SCC-641(P),les câbles suivants doivent être
Connexion de câble
1. D’abord,connectez une fin du connecteur de câble vidéo BNC au terminal de
production vidéo.(VIDEO OUT)
2. Ainsi,connectez l’autre fin du connceteur au terminal d’entrée vidéo du moniteur.
préparés.
Câble d’adaptateur électrique
Le câble connecté au terminal d’entrée électrique de SCC-641(P) est montré ci-dessous
avec une tension évaluée de 24VAC et ampacité de 1.5A.
F
3.Maintenant,branchez le câble d’adaptateur électrique. Utilisez un tournevis pour
visser une partie des deux lignes d’adaptateur électrique au terminal d’entrée
électrique.
Câble vidéo
Le câble de SCC-641(P) est le câble BNC pour connceter le terminal de production
vidéo au terminal d’entrée vidéo du moniteur.
4. Ajustez le commutateur ci-dessous à la tension appropriée.Ainsi connectez la prise
de l’adaptateur électrique au connecteur électrique.
5. Connectez le terminal de télécommande de SCC-641(P) et le contrôleur externe.
2-5
2-6
4. [Figure3,4] Joignez les câbles divers à l’adaptateur de caméra.(Voir les pages 2-6)
Installation de SCC-641(P)
1. [Figure1] Installez la structure sur le plafond.
(Référez-vous à la référence d’installation pour la longueur de la structure.)
* Encastré par le constructeur de la structure.
[Figure 1]
[Figure 3]
F
[Figure 4]
5. [Figure5] Correspondez à la BRKT-ancre et l’adaptateur de caméra et utilisez 4
tournevis pour les assembler.
Longueur de trou de plafond
2. Faites un trou dans le plafond où la caméra doit être installée.(Le trou doit être environs
[Figure 5]
Ø180)
3. [Figure2] Assemblez le BRKT-ANCHOR sur le plafond et vissez les 4 boulons.
[Figure 2]
2-7
2-8
6. [Figure6] Correspondez les 3 trous sur le dos de la caméra et le connecteur et tournez-la à
gauche environs 15degrés. (Examinez le système de verouillage (Locking)et le verouillage
de levier(Lever-Locking) est en place.)
* Utilisez les tournevis(BH M3XLB) pour joindre la Caméra et l’Adaptateur pour qu’ils ne se
Chapitre3 Vue d’ensemble de menu d’installation
déplacent pas.
[Figure 6]
Dans ce chapitre,nous parcourirons le menu d’installation de
SCC-641(P).D’abord nous regarderons la structure complète du menu
d’installation et les fonctions de chaque menu.
CONNECTEUR
F
7. [[Figure 7] Assemblez le dôme-couverture sur le dôme.
[Figure 7]
DôME-COUVERTURE
2-9
3-1
Contenu de menu d’installation
CAMERA
PROG VIDEO
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
SORTIE
OFF/ON...
INT/LIGNE...
1/2/3/4
OFF/ON...
QUITTER/SAUVER/PRESET
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL OFF/ON...
ALC.../MANU...
OFF/1/120~1/10K/AUTO/FIXE
OFF/ON
BA/BM/MANU...
POSI/NEGA
+/PIP
ON.../OFF
MIROIR
OFF/ON
DTL H
(0)----I-DTL V
(0)---I--RET
AF/MF/UNAF
OFF/X2~X10
QUITTER/SAUVER/PRESET
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
PRESET
PROG POSITION
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BALAYAGE
VIT CYCLE
SORTIE
MODE AUTO
PAN AUTO
PROG RONDE
...
1/2/3
PROG ALARME
PR PRIORITE ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
SORTIE
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
QUITTER/SAUVER
PR ENT ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
SORTIE
OFF/NO/NF
OFF/NO/NF
OFF/NO/NF
OFF/NO/NF
QUITTER/SAUVER
PR SORT ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
MOUVE
SORTIE
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
QUITTER/SAUVER
PR RONDE ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
MOUVE
SORTIE
OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
OFF/1~3/DEMI1/DEMI2/PLEIN
QUITTER/SAUVER
CONTRôLE SORTIE AUX
SORTIE1
SORTIE2
SORTIE3
SORTIE
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
QUITTER/SAUVER
AC
P.P/T
RET ORIGINE
POS ORIGINE
RETOURNEMENT
RAZ CAM
LANGAGE
SORTIE
OFF/6HEURE/12HEURE/18HEURE/24HEURE
OFF/ON
OFF/1~60MIN/2~12HEURE
0~127
OFF/ON
...
ON.../OFF
ON.../OFF
ON/OFF
1~60S
QUITTER/SAUVER/EFFACE
AUTRE PROG
3-2
F
FRANÇIS
QUITTER/SAUVER
3-3
Contenu de menu de bloc de camera
Menu de caméra consiste en menu de PROG CAMERA et Menu de PROG VIDEO.
La diagramme montrée ci-dessus illustre la structure complète du menu
(PROG VIDEO)
d’installation.Dans cette section,une description des particularités de menu
(PROG CAMERA)
d’installation permet aux utlisateurs de SCC-641(P) de façonner à leurs
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
OFF
INT
3
OFF
SORTIE
QUITTER
besoins personnels.
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
Camera ID
Le menu de CAMERA ID assigne l’ID au SCC-641(P) pour être montré sur le moniteur
connecté. Sur l’écran de menu de PROG CAMERA,sélectionnez CAMERA ID à ON et
F
pressez [ENTER].Vous verrez le sous-écran pour choisir finalement l’ID du
SCC-641(P).La CAMERA ID peut avoir jusqu’à 12 caractères alphanumérique,avec
plusieurs caractères spéciaux.La caméra assignée ID peut être placé à n’importe quel
emplacement désirable sur l’écran en utlisant le sub-menu de Location .
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
SORTIE
(CAMERA ID)
ON
INT
3
OFF
Pressez
[Enter]
QUITTER
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
: ! - + ✽ ()/
SP ï î SP
POSITION...
RET
SCC-641P.....
* " ... " signifie qu’il y a sub-menus.
3-4
3-5
DET MOUVE
SYNC
(PROG CAMERA)
Dans le menu de SYNC, la synchronization verticale peut
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
OFF
LIGNE...
3
OFF
SORTIE
QUITTER
être sélectée.
Le signal de synchronization verticale supporté par le
Detection Sensitivity et le secteur de Motion Detection. Si la fonction de Motion Detection est
mis,le mouvement d’un intrus peut être détecté . Quand le mouvement est détecté,il fait
ressortir le signal d’Alarme du contrôleur.
SCC-641(P) est le mode INT par montre dedans
SCC-641(P) et le mode LIGNE ajustant la synchronisation
Dans le DET MOUVE,vous pouvez choisir la fonction de MOUVEMENT Detection,Motion
(PROG CAMERA)
à la fréquence de ligne électrique extérieur.
Choisissez LIGNE et pressez [ENTER] .Vous pouvez voir le sub-menu de LIGNE
BLOC où vous pouvez ajuster la phase de LIGNE BLOC.
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
(DET MOUVE)
OFF
INT
3
ON...
Pressez
[Enter]
Vous pouvez utiliser le menu PHASE du submenu de Ligne de Serrure(Line Lock) pour
assigner autant de PHASE comme vous voulez.
SORTIE
(PROG CAMERA)
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
F
secteur,le secteur de l’écran où la fonction de Motion Detection va être appliqué,peut être mis
comme PRESET ou USER. Si le menu “ZONE” est mis à PRESET,la fonctionde Motion
Pressez
Detection va être appliqué à la partie de base du défaut d’usine défini d’avance de
[Enter]
SORTIE
PRESET...
MOYEN
Choisissez ON et pressez [ENTER] vous verrez le sub-menu “DET MOUVE” .Le menu de
(LIGNE BLOC)
OFF
LIGNE...
3
OFF
QUITTER
ZONE
SENSIBILITÉ
RET
QUITTER
PHASE ( 000)
RET
---- I ----
SCC-641(P). Mettez le menu de ZONE à User et pressez [ENTER],l’utilisateur peut choisir la
taille du secteur et l’emplacement où la fonction de Motion Detection doit être appliquée.
Quand le secteur ne clignote pas,vous pouvez utiliser les clefs[Left,Right,Up,Down] pour
VITE ZOOM
déplacer et mettez la taille.Si vous pressez [ENTER] quand la secteur ne clignote pas, il
commencera à clignoter et vous pouvez utiliser les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la
Dans le menu VITE ZOOM ,vous pouvez choisir la
(PROG CAMERA)
vitesse de la clef de ZOOM(Télé / Large)
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
Utilisez les clefs [Left] ou [Right] dans le menu de
VITE ZOOM pour choisir la vitesse.
position du secteur. Utilisez [ENTER] et les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la position
OFF
LIGNE...
3
OFF
et la taille du secteur Motion Detection. Si vous pressez [ENTER] encore une fois, vous
pouvez quitter le menu d’arrangement “ZONE”. Utilisez le menu “SENSIBILITÉ” pour metre la
sensibilité de détection de mouvement. Plus haut il est mis, plus sensible les mouvements de
1 : Agrandissement x 22 prend environs 17 secondes
comme la vitesse la plus lente.
SORTIE
QUITTER
détection se déplacent.
TAILLE
TAILLE
2 : Agrandissement x22 prend environs 10secondes
comme la vitesse lente.
Utilisez les clefs
3 : Agrandissement x22 prend environs 6 secondes
[Gauche,Droite,En haut
comme la vitesse rapide.
4 : Agrandissement x22 environs 3 secondes comme la
,En bas] Keys
POSITION
POSITION
vitesse la plus rapide.
* La fonction de Motion Detection ne fonctionne pas en traitant SHUTTER lent,
BALAYAGE, RONDE MODE ou JOYSTICK .
3-6
3-7
MENU DE PROG VIDEO
SORITIE
Le menu SORITIE est employé pour quitter le menu de jeu de caméra de SCC-641(P)
et retourner au MENU PRINCIPAL.
IRIS
Le niveau de production vidéo du moniteur peut être contrôlé par la taille d’Iris selon le
- QUITTER : ignore l’information changée et reconstitue l’information gardée.
niveau de la lumière entrante. Le niveau de production vidéo peut être mis dans le menu
- SAUVER : garde l’information de la condition d’arrangement du menu.
ALC(Compensation d’éclairage automatique). L’ouverture et la fermeture de la lentille
- PRESET : ignore l’information changée et reconstitue les défauts initiaux d’usine du
d’Iris peuvent être mis manuellement dans le menu MANU.
menu.
CJOUR (Sub-menu des menus ALC/Manu)
Avec caméra conventionnelle,l’éclairage fort de fond se heurte à la clarté d’objets en les
faisant sombre. Dans le SCC-641(P),l’arrangement du CJOUR (Compensation de
(PROG CAMERA)
Rétro-Éclairage ) le problème de rétro-éclairage et vous donne un écran éclair.
CAMERA ID
SYNC
VITE ZOOM
DET MOUVE
OFF
LIGNE...
3
OFF
ALC
F
Choisissez l’ALC de l’item IRIS.,et pressez [ENTER] et mettez le sub-menu au niveau
de production vidéo et CJOUR va être montré. Le niveau de production vidéo peut être
SORTIE
QUITTER
mis dans l’item de niveau en utilisant les clefs[ Left,Right]. Mettez le menu CJOUR à ON
et la fonction de Compensation de Rétro-Éclairage est appiqué aux secteurs d’écran de
menu de ZONE. Le secteur de l’écran où Compensation de Rétro-Éclairage doit être
appliqué peut être mis avec les items PRESET ou UTIL. Si le menu ZONE est mis à
PRESET, la fonction de Compensation de Rétro-Éclairage est appliquée aux défauts
initiaux d’usine du SCC-641(P) .Si le menu ZONE est mis à UTIL et [ENTER] est
appuyé, l’utilisateur peut choisir le secteur appliqué de la fonction de compensation de
rétro-éclairage.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
(ALC)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
Pressez
[Enter]
ZONE
CJOUR
NIVEAU
RET
UTIL...
OFF
(0) ---- I ----
Quand le secteur ne clignote pas,vous pouvez utiliser les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour
déplacer et mettre la taille. Si vous pressez [ENTER] quand la secteur ne clignote pas,il
commencera de clignoter et vous pouvez utiliser la clef [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre
la position du secteur. Utilisez [ENTER] et les clefs [Left,Right,Up,Down] pour mettre la
position et la taille du secteur Motion Detection. Si vous pressez [ENTER] encore une
fois,vous quitterez le menu d’arrangement “ZONE”.
3-8
3-9
(PROG VIDEO )
TAILLE
TAILLE
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
Utilisez les clefs
[Gauche,Droite,En haut
,En bas] Keys
POSITION
POSITION
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
MANU
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
MANU
Si l’item IRIS est mis à MANU,le sous-écran à ouvrir et fermer l’Iris manuellement va
être montré. En utilisant les clefs [Left,Right] dans l’item de niveau, vous pouvez mettre
l’arrangement de manuel d’Iris.
SORTIE
suivant.
OFF → 1/100(1/120) → 1/250 → 1/500 → 1/1000 → 1/2000 →
1/4000 → 1/10K → OFF → AUTOX2 → AUTOX4 → AUTOX6→
AUTOX8 → AUTOX12 → AUTOX16 → AUTOX24 → AUTOX32→
AUTOX48 → AUTOX64 → AUTOX96 → AUTOX128 → OFF→
FIXE X2→ FIXE X4 → FIXE X6 → FIXE X8 → FIXE X12 → FIXE X16 →
FIXE X24→ FIXE X32 → FIXE X48 → FIXE X64 → FIXE X96 → FIXE X128
(MANUAL)
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
Si vous pressez les clefs Left/ Right continuellement,la vitesse apparîtra dans l’oredre
MANU...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
Pressez
[Enter]
NIVEAU
RET
F
(00)---- I ----
CAG
Dans le menu de CAG(Contrôle de gain automatique),vous pouvez mettre le gain
SHUTTER
Dans le menu SHUTTER, l’obturateur électrique ultra-rapide et l’obturateur de vitesse basse
Automatique de SCC-641(P) et l’obturateur de vitesse bas FIXE peut être mis. La haute
vitesse de l’obturateur électrique soutient 7 vitesses différentes de 1/100 à 1/10000 de la
automatiquement quand la brillance de l’écran est filmée à moins que la norme dans
conditions d’éclairage bas.Pour contrôler automatiquement GAIN,mettez le menu CAG à
ON ou mettez-le à OFF pour contrôle manuel.Si le menu SHUTTER est mis à l’obturateur
de vitesse bas automatique,la valeur du menu CAG peut être ne pas changée.
seconde. L’obturateur de vitesse bas automatique et l’obturateur électrique de vitesse bas
FIXE soutiennent 12 vitesses différentes d’agrandissement 2x à 128x. L’obturateur de
vitesse basse est la fonction qui met l’obturateur de vitesse à bas pour voir clairement l’objet
filmé dans l’éclairage bas . Pour ralentir automatiquement la vitesse de l’obturateur en
sentant la brillance de la lumière, mettez à l’obturateur de vitesse bas Automatique. Si
l’utilisateur veut choisir la vitesse de l’obturateur, mettez-la à FIXE. Le nombre après Auto et
Fix est le nombre des champs gardés. Plus grand le nombre des champs,plus lentement la
vitesse d’obturateur arrive,ainsi l’objet était dans le mouvement ce serait flou.
3-10
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
MANU
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
3-11
BAL BLANCS
BAL BLANCS
Les feux sont généralement dénotés comme des températures colorées et exprimés
Le menu de BAL BLANCS assure que ce blanc est calibré normalement dans n’importe
dans les unités de Kelvin(°K).
Quelle condition colorée de température.Quand le menu de BAL BLANCS est mis au
On montre la température colorée de lumière générale ci-dessous.
mode BA,l’équilibre blanc est automatiquement spécifié selon la température colorée. En
cas d’arrangement du menu de BAL BLANCS à mode BM, presser[ENTER] en ayant un
papier blanc devant la caméra serait de mettre automatiquement l’équilibre blanc
conformément à la température colorée seulement un temps.
Si le menu de BAL BLANCS est mis au mode manuel,l’utilisateur peut mettre l’équilibre
10000。K
9000。K
blanc en tenant compte de l’illumination actuelle.
Ciel bleu
Pluvieux
- 3200 °K : mettre la température colorée à 3200°K
F
- 5600°K :mettre la température colorée à 5600°K
8000。K
- User(l’utilisateur) : mettre la valeur appropriée dans les graphes rouge
nuageux
(red)et bleu(blue).
7000。K
MANU: Choisissez l’item MANU et pressez [ENTER], le sub écran où vous pouvez
choisir White Balance manuel va être montré
6000。K
en partie nuageux
Utilisez les clefs Droite /Gauche pour choisir 3200 °K ou le mode UTIL dans le menu
PRESET.
5000。K
ensoleillé
(ABB/MANUEL)
(PROG VIDEO )
4000。K
lampe fluorescente
3000。K
lampe d’halogène
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
MANU...
OFF
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
Pressez
[Enter]
PRESET OFF(UTIL)...
ROUGE ( 00)
---- I ---BLEU
( 00)
---- I ---RET
2000。K
lampe de tungstène
lueur d’une bougie
1000。K
3-12
3-13
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
Dans le menu SPECIAL,POSI/NEGA,PIP,MIRIOR, et niveau de détail vertical et
horizontal peuvent être ajustés.
- POSI/NEGA :le signal de production vidéo est produit normale/inverse.
- PIP(Picture dans Picture) : Quand le ZOOM Digital est activé, le 1/16 écran réduit
au minimum va être montré.
- Mirror(miroir) : changer complètement le signal de production vidéo.
- DTL H : ajuster le niveau de détail horizontal.
- DTL V : ajuster le niveau de détail vertical.
Dans le menu AUTO FOCUS, la méthode Focus peut être mis à AF,MF,ou UNAF.
- AF : Avec le mode AUTO FOCUS, vous pouvez contrôler continuellement l’écran et il peut
se concentrer automatiquement. Il se concentrera automatiquement ainsi l’entrée de
clef de Focus n’est pas nécessaire.
- MF : dans le mode MANUAL FOCUS,l’utilisateur ajuste le Focus manuellement.
- UNAF : dans le mode UNAF le SCC-641(P) automatique se concentre suelement en se
déplaçant/s’arrêtant. Quand le SCC-641(P) ne se déplace pas il est le même que
le mode MF et quand il est déplacé/arrêté, il est le même que le mode AF.
Utilisez les clefs left/ right pour choisir AF,MF ou UNAF dans le menu AUTO FOCUS.
Choisissez On et pressez [ENTER], le sousmenu “SPECIAL” à choisir les fonctions
(PROG VIDEO )
spéciales va être montré.
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
(PROG VIDEO )
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
SORTIE
(SPECIAL)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNAF
OFF
Pressez
[Enter]
QUITTER
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIROIR
DTL H
DTL V
RET
+/OFF
OFF
( 0) ---- I -( 0) --- I ---
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNAF
OFF
F
QUITTER
D-ZOOM
Dans le menu D-ZOOM, vous pouvez choisir l’agrandissement de Zoom Digital. Vous
pouvez choisir l’agrandissement de OFF à 10 fois.Quand Zoom Digital est choisi à 10
Pour choisir les fonctions ,utilisez les clefs left /right pour choisir un item. Dans le menu
PIP,choisissez ON et pressez[ ENTER] . Utilisez les clefs [ left,right,up,down] pour
fois, il est Zoom optique pour 22 fois la taille ainsi la caméra peut filmer jusqu’à 220 fois.
Utilisez les clefs [left,right] pour choisir l’agrandissement dans le menu de D-ZOOM.
mettre la location de PIP.
※ PIP ne fonctionne pas dans le SHUTTER MODE de vitesse basse.
(PROG VIDEO )
(PROG VIDEO )
Quand le miroir est fonctionné, le miroir ne fonctionne pas dans la fenêtre PIP.
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
(SPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIROIR
DTL H
DTL V
RET
+/ON...
OFF
( 0) ---- I ---( 0) ---- I ----
Pressez
[Enter]
PIP Screen
SORTIE
IRIS
SHUTTER
CAG
BAL BLANCS
SPECIAL
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNAF
OFF
QUITTER
SORTIE
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNAF
X10
QUITTER
SORITIE
Il est le même que la fonction de du menu de PROG CAMERA .
3-14
3-15
PRESET
PROG POSITION
Le total de 128 presets sont disponible incluant le choix d’emplacement PAN/ TILT et
ZOOM/ FOCUS et fondant les conditions de l’écran et le contrôle.
De “PROG POSITION …” pressez [ENTER] pour entrer
PRESET NO. 0
PR PAN/TILT
PR ZOOM/FOCUS
dans PAN /TILT, FOCUS /ZOOM SET écran pour mettre
Parmi les 128 PRESETS,PRESET 0 : POS ORIGING,PRESET1 : ALARME 1,
l’emplacement PAN/ TILT et la condition FOCUS /ZOOM
PRESET2 :ALARME2,PRESET3 :ALARME3,PRESET4 :ALARME4 : PRESET5
,alors pressez [ENTER] pour retourner au menu plus haut.
:mis comme MOTION corrspondant Preset spécial.
PROG VIDEO
C’est l’écran mettant la fonction pour chaque PRESET. Référez-vous à l’explication sous
le menu de “PROG VIDEO”.
(PRESET CARTE)
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTRE PROG...
Pressez
[Enter]
0H 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11
12
13
15 16
17
18
20 21
22
23
25 26
27
28
30 31
ID:PRESET 0
4
9
14
19
24
29
RET
PRESET ID
PRESET NO. 0 ID
C’est la fonction d’installation d’ID pour chaque
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:! - + * ()/
SP
SP
POSITION...
RET
PRESET 0....
PRESET.ID peut être mis jusqu’à 12 caractères en
utilisant les clefs left,right,up,down.
L’emplacement ID peut être mis dans le sousmenu
“POSITION…”
BALAYAGE
PRESET NO. 0
Pressez
[Enter]
PROG POSITION
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BALAYAGE
VIT CYCLE
SORTIE
Cette fonction s’installe pour le mouvement ou aucun
...
OFF...
ON...
ON
2S
mouvement dans le mouvement de “BALAYAGE ”.
Quand il est PRESET à “ON” il inclut le mouvement
F
PRESET NO. 0
PROG POSITION
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BALAYAGE
VIT CYCLE
SORTIE
...
OFF...
ON...
ON
2S
QUITTER
BALAYAGE et à “OFF” aucun mouvement.
QUITTER
VIT CYCLE
C’est une fonction fondant l’emplacement de PRESET de VIT CYCLE dans le
mouvement “BALAYAGE”.
Il peut mettre VIT CYCLE de 1-60 Sec.
SORITIE
"QUITTER": Ne garde pas l’information choisie et retourne au menu plus haut.
"SAUVER": Garde l’information choisie et retourne au menu plus haut.
"EFFACE" : Supprime l’information choisie et reconstitue le Défaut et retourne au menu
plus haut.
3-16
3-17
MODE AUTO
PROG STOP
Les fonctions AUTO PAN et RONDE sont dans le AUTO MODE.
STOP PROG!
“PROG STOP” entre dans l’écran d’installation de
PAN AUTO
Après sélection de deux points(PAN /TILT) de DEM et STOP,il boucle continuellement
STOP PROG en appuyant sur [ENTER]. Ajustez
l’emplacement de PAN/ TILT et pressez ENTER pour
dans le jeu d’installation SPEED.
retourner au menu plus haut.
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
DIRECTION
(MODE AUTO)
** MENU **
PAN AUTO
PROG RONDE
...
1...
Pressez
Fondez la direction de mouvement d’emplacement de DEM à STOP(standard
d’emplacement PAN).
“Droit”:
“Gauche”:
[Enter]
RET
F
PAN AUTO
Pressez
[Enter]
PROG DEM
PROG STOP
DIRECTION
SANS FIN
VITESSE
VIT CYCLE
...
...
GAUCHE
OFF
PAS20
2 S
SORTIE
QUITTER
SANS FIN
C’est la fonction de rotation d’un 360 degrés qui s’arrête seulement pour le VIT CYCLE dans
les positions de DEM et de STOP.Il peut être mis à “ON” ou “OFF”.
PROG DEM
De “PROG DEM…” entre dans l’écran d’installation de
DEM PROG en appuyant sur [ENTER]
Après la sélection des emplacements de PAN/ TILT,
3-18
DEM PROG!
VITESSE
C’est une fonction d’arrangement pour le mouvement de vitesse d’installation. Il peut
être mis du STEP1 à STEP64.
pressez[ ENTER] encore une fois pour retourner au
VIT CYCLE
menu plus haut.
C’est une fonction pour fonder le temps pour rester dans la position de DEM et STOP.
3-19
RONDE
PROG ALARME
C’est une fonction de replay(rejouer) pour que les fonctions manuelles comme
Il consiste en 4 ALARME INPUTs et 3 SORT ALARME. Il peut sentir une entrée
PAN,TILT,ZOOM et FOCUS sont joué pendant 30 secondes.
d’ALARME de Détecteurs extérieurs et il exécute avec PRESET ou la fonction de
modèle et produit le signal d’A SORT ALARME.
Il reconnaît le signal d’entrée ALARME comme le signal ALARME quand il contient plus
(MODE AUTO)
** MENU **
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
Pressez
PAN AUTO
PROG RONDE
que 150ms pour peu de temps.Chaque temps de mouvement d’ALARME est décidé
...
1...
[Enter]
selon sa correspondance à VIT CYCLE de RONDE et RONDE connecté.
PR ALARME
** MENU **
RET
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODE AUTO...
PROG ALARME...
AUTER PROG...
Pressez
[Enter]
PR PRIORITE ALARME..
PR ENT ALARME..
PR SORT ALARME..
PR RONDE ALARME..
CONTRÔLE SORTIE
AUX..
F
RET
PROG RONDE1
Pressez
[Enter]
PR PRIORITE ALARME
PRIORITE ALARME
Met la priorité de 4 ALARME d’entrée et correspond à
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
priorité. La priorité du défaut est ALARME1:1, ALARME2:2,
1
2
3
4
ALARME3:3, ALARME4:4. Si l’ALARME est fonctionné en
même temps et la priorité est la même,il fonctionnera selon
la priorité du défaut.Tandis qu’ ALARME est fonctioné il ne
SORTIE
QUITTER
peut pas détecter MOUVE.
RONDE peut être mis à 3. Coisissez 1,2 ou 3 avec la clef droite/ gauche dans le
” PROG RONDE” et pressez [ENTER] pour entrer dans l’écran d’installation de
RONDE.
De ce moment “ PROG RONDE 1 “ est parti pendant 30 secondes, il mémorise les
mouvements MANUAL et après 30 secondes il retournera au menu plus haut.Si vous
voulez finir l’installation avant que 30 secondes finissent , pressez [ENTER].
PR ENT ALARME
Mettez le TYPE à “NO”(ouverture normale), “NF”(fermeture
normale),ou “OFF” selon les particularités du Détecteur
ENT ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
NO
NF
NO
NF
connecté.
SORTIE
3-20
QUITTER
3-21
SORT ALARME
SORT ALARME
Chaque entrée d’ALARME correpond à un de 3
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
MOUVE
d’ALRME OUT. <L’ALARME 3 est désigné comme
Replay OUT>
AUTRE PRG
1
2
3
2
1
AC(CALIBRATION AUTO)
Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la fonction CALIBRATION AUTO.
La SCC-C641(P) supporte la fonction Calibration Automatique en vue d’augmenter la
précision de l’objectif et du moteur PAN/TILT.
SORTIE
QUITTER
RONDE ALARME
Vous pouvez sélectionner l’une des valeurs suivantes :
OFF/6HEURE/12HEURE/18HEURE/24HEURE. Si aucune touche n’est appuyée pendant un
certain temps défini par l’utilisateur, "A.C." apparaît à l’écran durant l’initialisation de
Cela met l’opération de mouvement de RONDE en
l’OBJECTIF et du PAN/TILT.
introduisant ALARME.Quand l’ALARME est introduit la
correspondance sera comme suit : ALARME 1 input à
PRESET1,ALARME2input à PRESET2,ALARME3 input
à PRESET3,ALARME4 input à PRESET4 et MOUVE
input à PRESET5.
P.P/T(P/T PROPORTIONEL)
RONDE ALARME
ALARME1
ALARME2
ALARME3
ALARME4
MOUVE
DEM1
PLEIN
DEM2
4
2
Cette fonction permet de changer la vitesse des mouvements PAN/TILT suivant le
changement de puissance du ZOOM lors d’un contrôle PAN/TILT manuel. Lorsque vous la
réglez sur ON, la vitesse augmente avec le ZOOM LARGE et diminue avec le ZOOM TELE.
F
Quand l’ALARM est fonctionné,il restera l’emplacement
PRESET correspondant l’Alarm pour VIT CYCLE et
RET ORIGINE
SORTIE
QUITTER
l’ALARM conncté à RONDE fonctionnera
Lorsqu’aucune touche n’est actionnée ou qu’aucun mouvement n’est enregistré pendant une
certaine période, la camera se déplacera vers la position de départ. La position ORIGINE
continuellement les mouvements RONDE.
peut être configurée dans le menu POS ORIGINE.
L’OFF dans le menu d’installation ne fait pas fonctionner le RONDE, et il signifie 1 →
RONDE1,2 →RONDE2,3→ RONDE3, motion continue de DEMI1→
CONFIGURATION DU DÉLAI DE RETOUR À LA POSITION DE DÉPART:
OFF (désactivé) : Annulation de la fonction RETOUR ORIGINE
RONDE1+RONDE2,motion continue de DEMI2→RONDE2+RONDE3et motion
(retour à la position de départ)
continue de FULL→ RONDE1+RONDE2+RONDE3 .
OFF ➞ 1 MIN ➞ 2 MIN ➞ 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ➞ ~12HEURE
CONTRÔLE SORT
POS ORIGINE
Vous pouvez sélectionner la position de départ à partir des positions préréglées et
Cela met la motion SORT ALARME pour continuer ou
CONTRÔOLE SORTIE AUX
numérotées de 0 à 127.
agir seulement quand l’ALARME travaille.S’il est mis à
SORTIE1
SORTIE2
SORTIE3
RETOURNEMENT
OFF la motion fonctionne seulement quand l’ ALARME
ON
OFF
ON
fera ressortir(Actif "bas"),et s’il est mis à ON, l’SORT
Lorsque vous actionnez la fonction Tilt (inclinaison) à 90 ° à l’aide de la manette, la fonction PAN
ALARME fonctionnera toujours indépendamment de
(panoramique) de la camera effectue automatiquement une rotation de 180 °. La zone opposée
l’ALARME.
SORTIE
QUITTER
à celle de l’inclinaison (Tilt) deviendra alors visible.
Cela produit un effet d’agrandissement de la zone d’inclinaison de 180 degrés.
3-22
3-23
RAZ CAM
La fonction RAZ CAM efface tous les paramètres définis par l’utilisateur et restaure les
valeurs par défaut.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez cette fonction, le message “RAZ CAMERA?” apparaît à l’écran.
Sélectionnez “ANNULER” pour revenir à l’écran du menu de configuration ou sélectionnez
OK pour restaurer les valeurs prédéfinies par le fabricant.
● Soyez prudent lorsque vous lancez la commande RAZ CAM, puisque tous vos paramètres
seront effacés.
Spécification du produit
SCC-641
NO
Articles
1
Type de produit
Contenus
- Lentille de Zoom à corps simple
- AC 24± 10% (60Hz± 0.3Hz)
2
Entrée électrique
3
Consommation électrique
4
Type de radiodiffusion
5
Dispositif d’image
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Pixel efficace
- 768(H) x 494(V)
7
Mode de balayage
8
Fréquence de ligne de
balayage
9
Mode de synchronisation
- 18W
- Système coloré standard NTSC
- 525 lignes, Entrelacer 2:1
- Horizontal : 15, 734 Hz(INT) / 15, 750 Hz(L/L)
Vertical
: 59.94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LIGNE BLOC
10
Resolution
11
Proportion S/N
12
Illumination d’objet Min.
13
Température colorée
- BA/BM/Manu Mode
14
Production de signal
- COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- Ligne TV480
F
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Sense UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B Cour de Gain)
- un corps; 22X Lentille de Zoom
15
OBJECTIF
- longueur focale : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Ouverture : F1.6(Large), F3.8( Télé)
- Centre automatique
16
Fonction de PAN
- Gamme de PAN : 360 Infini(Endless)
- La vitesse de Preset Pan : 240° /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de Pan Manue : 0.8° ~ 90° /sec (64Step)
17
Fonction de TILT
- Gamme de TILT : 0° ~ 90°
- La vitesse de Preset TILT : 150° /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de TILT Manue : 0.8° ~ 45° /sec (64Step)
18
Télécommande
- Télé/Large(ZOOM), Proche/Loin(FOCUS),
Iris Ouverture/Fermeture Pan/Inclination
Alarme
19
20
Température d’opération
21
Humidité d’opération
22
Taille
23
Poids
- Entrée d’Alarme : 4 IN(5mA Coulée)
- Production d’Alarme : 3 OUT (Collecteur ouvert : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relay : 1, NO, NC, COM
2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC Max)
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F~122°F)
- ~90%
- Dôme : 147 (ø),
3-24
Contour : 159.5(ø) x 176(H)(Adaptateur:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-25
Spécification du produit
SCC-641P
NO
Articles
1
Type de produit
Contenus
- AC 24± 10% (50Hz± 0.3Hz)
2
Entrée électrique
3
Consommation électrique
4
Type de radiodiffusion
5
Dispositif d’image
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Pixel efficace
- 752(H) x 582(V)
7
8
Mode de balayage
Fréquence de ligne de
balayage
Mises en garde
- Lentille de Zoom à corps simple
- 18W
•
- Système coloré standard PAL
•
- 625 lignes, Entrelacer 2:1
- Horizontal : 15, 625 Hz(INT) / 15, 625 Hz(L/L)
Vertical
: 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
9
Mode de synchronisation
10
Resolution
11
Proportion S/N
12
Illumination d’objet Min.
13
Température colorée
- BA/BM/Manu Mode
14
Production de signal
- COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- INT/LIGNE BLOC
•
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. est le propriétaire des droits d’auteur
de ce guide d’utilisation.
Il est strictement interdit de copier ce guide sous forme électronique,
mécanique, audio ou autre sans la permission explicite de la part de
Samsung Electronics.
Le présent guide d’utilisation peut faire l’objet de modifications en
fonction des améliorations apportées au produit à une date ultérieure.
- Ligne TV480
F
- 52 dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (Sense UP X4)
(0.01 Lux)
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B Cour de Gain)
- un corps; 22X Lentille de Zoom
15
OBJECTIF
- longueur focale : 3.6 to 79.2 mm
- Ouverture : F1.6(Large), F3.8( Télé)
- Centre automatique
- Gamme de PAN : 360 Infini(Endless)
16
Fonction de PAN
- La vitesse de Preset Pan : 240° /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de Pan Manue : 0.8° ~ 90° /sec (64Step)
- Gamme de TILT : 0° ~ 90°
17
Fonction de TILT
- La vitesse de Preset TILT : 150° /sec, maximum
- La vitesse de TILT Manue : 0.8° ~ 45° /sec (64Step)
18
Télécommande
- Télé/Large(ZOOM), Proche/Loin(FOCUS),
Iris Ouverture/Fermeture Pan/Inclination
19
3-26
Alarme
20
Température d’opération
21
Humidité d’opération
22
Taille
23
Poids
- Entrée d’Alarme : 4 IN(5mA Coulée)
- Production d’Alarme : 3 OUT (Collecteur ouvert : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relay : 1, NO, NC, COM
2A 30VDC, 0.5A 125VAC Max)
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F~122°F)
- ~90%
- Dôme : 147 (ø),
Contour : 159.5(ø) x 176(H)(Adaptateur:23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-27
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Manual del usuario
Es
Medidas de seguridad
El propósito de esta información es garantizar el uso apropiado de este
producto con el fin de prevenir cualquier peligro o daño a la propiedad.
Sírvase tomar en cuenta todas las medidas de seguridad.
* Estas medidas están divididas en avisos de "Advertencia" y avisos de
"Precaución", tal como se distinguen a continuación:
Advertencia: El ignorar este aviso de advertencia puede ocasionar lesión
grave o la muerte.
Precaución: El ignorar este aviso de precaución puede ocasionar lesión o
un daño a la propiedad.
Los avisos de advertencia le
alertan de un riesgo potencial de
muerte o de lesión grave.
Los avisos de precaución le alertan
de un riesgo potencial de lesión o de
daño a la propiedad.
Advertencia
1. Asegúrese de usar exclusivamente el adaptador suministrado.
(El usar un adaptador diferente al suministrado puede ocasionar un
incendio, un choque eléctrico o un daño al producto.)
2. Cuando vaya a conectar la fuente de alimentación y los cables de las
señales, revise antes los terminales de conexión externa. Conecte los
cables de las señales de alarma a los terminales para las alarmas, el
adaptador de CA al receptáculo de entrada de CA y el adaptador de CC a
la entrada de CC, asegurándose de tener en cuenta las polaridades.
(Una conexión incorrecta de la fuente de alimentación puede ocasionar un
incendio, un choque eléctrico o un daño al producto.)
3. No conecte varias cámaras a un adaptador.
(El exceder la capacidad puede producir una generación anormal de calor
o un fuego.)
(Una eventual caída de la cámara puede causar lesiones corporales.)
4. Enchufe firmemente el cable eléctrico en el receptáculo de corriente.
(Una conexión floja puede producir fuego.)
5. Al instalar la cámara en una pared o un techo, sujétela bien y con firmeza.
(Una eventual caída de la cámara puede causar lesiones corporales.)
6. No coloque encima de la cámara objetos conductores
(p.ej., destornilladores, monedas, u objetos metálicos) o envases llenos de
agua. (El hacerlo puede causar daños corporales debido a la posible
ocurrencia de fuego, choque eléctrico o la caída de los objetos.)
7. No instale la unidad en sitios húmedos, con mucho polvo o ennegrecidos
por el humo. (El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque eléctrico.)
8. Si hay algún olor inusual o humo que sale de la unidad, deje de utilizar el
producto.
En ese caso, desconecte inmediatamente la fuente de alimentación y
póngase en contacto con el centro de servicios. (El continuar usando la
cámara en tales condiciones puede provocar un incendio o un choque
eléctrico.)
9. Si este producto presenta una falla de funcionamiento, comuníquese con la
tienda en donde lo adquirió, o con el centro de servicios más cercano.
Nunca desarme ni modifique este producto de ninguna manera.
(Samsung no es responsable por los problemas causados por
modificaciones no autorizadas o por intentos de reparación.)
10. Al limpiarlo, no salpique agua directamente sobre las piezas del producto.
(El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque eléctrico.)
Limpie la superficie con un paño seco. Nunca use detergentes o
limpiadores químicos en el producto, ya que esto puede causar
decoloración de la superficie o causar un daño en el acabado.
Precaución
1. No deje caer objetos en el producto ni lo golpee. Manténgalo alejado de
lugares sujetos a vibración excesiva o interferencia magnética.
2. No lo instale en un sitio sometido a altas temperaturas (por encima
de122°F), a bajas temperaturas (por debajo de 14°F), o a mucha
humedad.(El hacerlo puede ocasionar un fuego o un choque eléctrico.)
3. Evite los sitios expuestos a la luz del sol o que estén cerca de fuentes de
calor tales como calentadores o radiadores.
(El no observar esto puede ocasionar un riesgo de fuego.)
4. Si usted quiere cambiar de ubicación el producto ya instalado, no olvide
apagarlo antes de moverlo o de reinstalarlo.
5. Instale en un sitio con buena ventilación.
6. Saque el enchufe del tomacorriente cuando haya una tormenta eléctrica.
(El no observar esto puede ocasionar un incendio o un daño al producto.)
Es
Antes de Instalar el equipo
Aprobación de estándares
Este es un manual básico de usuario del SCC-641(P).
Contiene todas las instrucciones básicas de uso del SCC-641(P)
desde una simple introducción de las funciones de control hasta
métodos de instalación y menú de ajustes.
Recomendamos leer este manual de instrucciones antes de un
uso del mismo, tanto por usuarios avanzados como por usuarios
principiantes.
El apartado más usado del SCC-641(P) será el menú de ajustes.
El menú de ajustes está explicado con detalle en el Capítulo 3
Menú de ajustes.
Nota: Este equipo ha sido probado y cumple los límites de un dispositivo digital Clase B
según la parte 15 de las reglas FCC. Estos límites están diseñados para ofrecer una protección
Es
razonable contra la interacción dañina en una instalación residencial. Este equipo genera, usa y
El manual debe ser leído de principio a fin, pero para usuarios
que deseen centrarse en un capítulo consulte el Sumario
siguiente:
puede irradiar energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y utiliza de acuerdo con las
instrucciones, puede causar interferencias dañinas a la comunicación por radio.
Sin embargo, no hay garantía alguna de que las interferencias no ocurrirán en una instalación
concreta. Si este equipo causa interferencia dañina a la recepción de radio o televisión, puede
determinarse encendiendo y apagando el equipo, y se anima al usuario a tratar de corregir la
“Capítulo 1 Características del SCC-641(P)” incluye una breve
introducción del SCC-641(P), nombres de los componentes y
funciones, y ajustes de los microinterruptores.
interferencia por medio de una o más de las medidas siguientes:de las medidas siguientes:
“Capítulo 2 Instalación del SCC-641(P)” explica el
procedimiento de instalación del SCC-641(P) y proporciona
consejos para la preparación del lugar de instalación.
- Pida ayuda a su proveedor o a un técnico experimentado de radio o TV.
- Reoriente o coloque en otro lugar la antena receptora.
- Aumente la separación entre el equipo y el receptor.
- Conecte el equipo a una toma eléctrica en un circuito diferente de aquel al que está
conectado el receptor.
“Capítulo 3 Menú de Ajustes” presenta la estructura del menú
de ajustes y una detallada explicación de las funciones de cada
submenú.
“El apéndice de las Especificaciones del producto SCC-641(P)”
contiene las especificaciones del producto SCC-641(P) en
categorías detalladas.
1-1
1-2
“INDICE”
3-9
-IRIS
3-9
Antes de Instalar el equipo
1-1
-OBTURADOR
3-10
Capítulo 1
Características del SCC-641P
1-5
-CAG
3-11
Introducción del SCC-641P
1-6
-BAL BLANCO
3-13
Localización de controles - Frontall
1-7
-ESPECIAL
3-14
Localización de controles - Posterior
1-8
-AUTO FOCO
3-15
Conexiones del adaptador
1-9
-D-ZOOM
3-15
Ajustes Iniciales
1-10
-SALIDA
3-15
Ajustes de la terminación del RS-422/RS-485
1-11
PRESET
3-16
Configuración Conmutadores
1-12
AUTO MODE
3-18
Instalación del SCC-641P
2-1
-AUTO PAN
3-18
Chequeo del contenido
2-2
-RONDA
3-20
Precauciones para la instalación y uso
2-3
ALARMA PROG
3-21
Preparación del cable
2-5
ALTRA PROG
3-23
Conexión del cable
2-6
Instalación de SCC-641(P)
2-7
Especificaciones del producto
3-25
Menú de ajustes
3-1
Contenido del menú de ajustes
3-2
MENÚ GENERAL DE CÁMARA CONTENIDOS
3-5
CÁMARA
3-5
-CÁMARA ID
3-5
-SYNC
3-6
-VEL ZOOM
3-6
-DET MOVI
3-7
-SALIDA
3-8
Capítulo 2
Capítulo 3
1-3
PROG VÍDEO
Es
1-4
CAPITULO 1 CARACTERÍSTICAS DEL SCC-641P
Introducción del SCC-641P
En este capítulo se introduce brevemente el SCC-641P y
El domo SCC-641P es una cámara de vigilancia con zoom incorporado.
sus principales funciones, controles y ajuste de
Proporciona altos niveles de seguridad de CCTV para banca o todo tipo de
interruptores.
compañías.
El domo SCC-641P es una cámara de vigilancia de altas prestaciones
usando zoom x22 y zoom digital x10, siendo un zoom total de x220.
El SCC-641P tiene las siguientes funciónes: incremento de sensibilidad que
permite visualizar imágenes en ambientes con luz practicamente nula,
Es
Balance de blancos que permite corregir la los colores naturales
dependiendo de la luz ambiente, Compensación de contraluz que permite
ver objetos con claridad incluso bajo condiciones de luz muy brillantes y
Autoenfoque que permite autoenfocar la imagen de acuerdo al movimento
que lleve el SCC-641P. Es una cámara con múltiples funciones que
contempla además todas las más importantes funciones de otras cámaras
de vigilancia.
El SCC-641P dispone de funciones de alarma para situaciones de alerta y
movimiento de la cámara a la dirección deseada, se pueden controlar
remotamente las funciones de ZOOM IN y ZOOM OUT mediante el teclado
SSC-1000, el grabador digital SHR-2016P y el transmisor web SNS-100P.
1-5
1-6
Localización de controles - Posterior
Localización de controles
Frontal
Es
Cubierta externa
Cubierta Interna
Lente Zoom
1-7
1-8
Conexiones del adaptador
Arrangement de commutateur
Installation d’adresse de camera
Dip Switch setting est même comme l’exemple suivant.
EX) CAMERA ADDR : quand il est le nombre 1, mettez comme suit.
1
PLACA de adaptador SCC-641 (P)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
SW500
Arrangement de protocole de communication.
Utilisez les nombres 5-8 PIN de SW501 pour mettre Protocole de communication.
PIN
Comp
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
F
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
G
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
A : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) HALF
B : SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) MAXIMUM
Es
H
ON
ON
ON
I
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
J
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
K
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
L
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SW500
M
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW501
N
ON
OFF
ON
ON
O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P
ON
ON
ON
ON
SEE
INSTRUCTIN MANUAL
REPORTEZ-VOUS
AU
GUIDE D’UTILISATION
(VUE DE DESSOUS)
Configuration du débit en bauds
Utilisez les BROCHES 3 et 4 du SW501.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
PIN 3
PIN 4
4800 BPS
ON
ON
9600 BPS
OFF
ON
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
38400 BPS
OFF
OFF
BAUD RATE
1-9
1-10
Ajuste de la terminación RS-422/RS-485
CONFIGURACIÓN CONMUTADORES
Como muestra la figura cuando se conectan varios SCC-641P a un controlador (por ej.
El SSC-1000) el último domo debe ser terminado en cuanto a impedancia del cable.
División
n < 128
Terminación
SW1-ON
<Conexión RS-422A / RS-485 en HALF DUPLEX>
Para ello se deben usar los interruptores 1 y 2, en ON significa final de la línea.
n < 128
División
<Conexión RS-422A/RS485 en FULL DUPLEX>
Si se programan varios domos con la misma dirección puede ocurrir
PRECAUCION
1-11
un fallo de comunicaciones.
División
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
Dirección de receptor
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Es
1-12
Dirección de receptor
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1-13
SW500-1 SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7 SW500-8
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Dirección de receptor
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Es
1-14
Dirección de receptor
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
1-15
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Dirección de receptor
SW500-1
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7 SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Es
1-16
Antes de la instalación
CAPITULO 2 INSTALACION DEL SCC-641P
En este capítulo revisaremos los puntos principales antes de la
instalación, necesidades para la misma y precauciones durante la
instalación de SCC-641(P). Después le mostraremos la instalación en sí
de SCC-641(P) y las conexiones de cable.
Chequeo del contenido de la caja
Por favor compruebe que todos los componentes indicados más abajo han llegado en
la caja del equipo:
Es
SCC-641(P)
Anclaje en U
Instrucciones, embellecedor y conectores
Adaptador/conector de cámara
Cubierta
2-1
2-2
Precauciones para la instalacián y uso
Nunca encare el SCC-641P al sol
Esté el SCC-641P en uso o no, nunca encare el SCC-641P al sol. Tenga
No intente desmontar el SCC-641P
cuidado de no exponer el SCC-641P con luces muy fuertes cercanas u otros
Existe riesgo de descarga eléctrica si manipula los tornillos de la tapa
brillos y luces reflectantes de objetos.
posterior del domo. Se recomienda feacientemente evitar la manipulación del
interior de la unidad SCC-641P. Si precisa una inspección interna consulte
El SCC-641P debe funcionar en ambientes estables. Estas son las
con su proveedor.
características de un ambiente estable.
Temperatura : -10°C ~ +50°C(14°F~ 122°F)
Nivel de humedad : 90% o menos
Manipule el SCC-641P con cuidado
Aunque el SCC-641P es un producto duradero, manejarlo con cuidado
Debe usar una alimentación adecuada a las especificaciones del
alargará su vida operativa y se preveerán posibles fallos. Evite sacudir o
producto:
golpear directamente la cámara para evitar daños y manéjelo y almacénelo
Potencia consumida : 18W
con cuidado.
Alimentación : 24AC, 1.5A
Es
No exponga el SCC-641P a la lluvia o polvo o en ambientes húmedos
Si el SCC-641P toma contacto con el agua, desconecte la alimentación
inmediatamente y contacte son su proveedor. El polvo puede dañar el
SCC-641P y se incrementa el peligro de descarga eléctrica.
No use detergentes fuertes ni abrasivos para limpiar el cuerpo del
SCC-641P
Si se ensucia el SCC-641P use trapos secos para limpiar la unidad. En caso
de que la suciedad sea dificil de quitar use un jabón suave y limpie con
cuidado.
2-3
2-4
Preparación del cable
Para instalar el SCC-641P debe tener preparados los siguientes cables.
Conexión del cableado
1. Primero conecte un coaxial del Vídeo Out del SCC-641P al Vídeo In de un monitor.
2. Conecte el cable de alimentación del alimentador. Use un destornillador para
conectar la alimentación en las bornas IN de 24VAC del SCC-641P.
Cable de alimentación
Debe proveerse de un alimentador de 24VAC y 1.5A
Es
3. Conecte el mando controlador con el domo. Use el cable proporcionado con el
mando SSC-1000. Conecte el RX OUT del mando controlador (SSC-1000) al Txd
del SCC-641P
Cable coaxial
El cable de vídeo para el SCC-641P debe ser un coaxial RG59 (hasta 300m) o RG11
(hasta 600m) con conectores BNC en ambos extremos para conectar entre el Vídeo Out
de la cámara y el Vídeo In del monitor.
4. Ajuste el interruptor bajo el Adaptador eléctrico al voltaje adecuado. Después,
conecte el enchufe del Adaptador eléctrico al conector.
5. Conecte el terminal del Control remoto de SCC-641(P) y el mando Controlador
externo.
2-5
2-6
4. (Figura 3 y 4) Conecte todos los cables indicados en la página 14.
Instalación del SCC-641P
1. Figura 1. Instalación del equipo empotrado
(Consulte la guía de Instalación acerca de la longitud de la estructura)
*
Empotrar en el cuerpo de la estructura.
[figura 1]
[figura 3]
[figura 4]
Es
5. (Figura 5) Ensamble el Adaptador de la cámara al anclaje en U usando 4 tornillos
(PH M4X8) para unirlos.
Longitud del agujero del techo
2. Haga un agujero en el techo donde vaya a ser instalada la cámara.
(El agujero debe ser aproximadamente de 180 mm de diámetro).
[figura 5]
3. (Figura 2) Instale el soporte en U con 4 tornillos.
Adaptador de cámara
Anclaje en U
2-7
[figura 2]
2-8
6. (Figura 6) Inserte los tres espárragos del cuerpo del domo en el resultante de la figura 5
(adaptador de cámara más anclaje en U) y girelo unos 15. (Chequee el sonido que se
produce al encajar una pieza con la otra y que está en posición correcta)
* Use los tornillos (BH M3XL8) para fijar el cuerpo del domo al adaptador de la cámara de
forma la unidad ensamblada no se mueva.
[figura 6]
CAPITULO 3 MENU DE AJUSTES
En este capítulo se recorrerá el menú de ajustes del SCC-641P.
Primero se verá la estructura del menú de ajustes y luego se
explicarán cada uno de los menús.
Adaptador+anclaje U
Cuerpo del domo
Es
7. (Figura 7) Coloque el embellecedor del domo en el domo.
[figura 7]
Embellecedor
2-9
3-1
Estructura del menú de ajustes
CÁMARA
PROG VIDEO
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
SALIDA
OFF/ON...
INT/L_EA...
1/2/3/4
OFF/ON...
SALIR/GUARDAR/PRESET
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL OFF/ON...
ALC.../MANU...
OFF/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FIJO
OFF/ON
BA/BM/MANU...
POSI/NEGA +/PIP
OFF/ON...
ESPEJO
OFF/ON
DTL H
(0)----I-DTL V
(0)---I--VUE
AF/MF/UNOAF
AUS/X2~X10
SALIR/GUARDAR/PRESET
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
PRESET
PROG POSICIÓN
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BARRIDO
CICLO TIEMPO
SALIDA S
AUTO MODO
AUTO PAN
PROG RONDA
...
1/2/3
ALARMA PROG
PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
SALIDA
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
SALIR/GUARDAR
PROG ENT ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
SALIDA
OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
OFF/N.ABIERTO/N.CERRADO
SALIR/GUARDAR
PROG SAL ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
MOVI
SALIDA
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
SALIR/GUARDAR
PROG RONDA ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
MOVI
SALIDA
OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
OFF/1~3/MEDIO1/MEDIO2/LLENO
SALIR/GUARDAR
CONTROL SALIDA AUX
SALIDA1
SALIDA2
SALIDA3
SALIDA
OFF
OFF
OFF
SALIR/GUARDAR
AC
P.P/T
VUELTA ORIG
POS DE ORIG
REVOCACIÓN
RESET CÁM...
IDIOMA
SALIDA
OFF/6HORA/12HORA/18HORA/24HORA
ON/OFF
OFF/1~60MIN/2~12HORA
0~127
OFF/ON
...
ON.../OFF
ON.../OFF
ON/OFF
1~60S
ALIR/GUARDAR/BORRAR
ALTRA PROG
3-2
Es
ESPANOL
SALIR/GUARDAR
3-3
MENÚ GENERAL DE CÁMARA Contenidos
El diagrama anterior ilustra la estructura del menú de ajustes. En la siguiente
El Menú de cámara consiste en el Menú de CONFIGURACIÓN DE CÁMARA (CAMERA
SET) y el de CONFIGURACIÓN DE VÍDEO (VIDEO SET).
sección se describen con detalle cada uno de los menús y submenús.
(PROG VIDEO)
(PROG CÁMARA)
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
OFF
INT
3
OFF
SALIDA
SALIR
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
CÁMARA ID
El menú CÁMARA ID asigna una identificación al SCC-641P que se visualizará en el
Es
monitor conectado. Seleccionar CÁMARA ID a ON y presionar [ENTER]. Se verá la
sub-pantalla para escribir el nombre del SCC-641P. La Cámara ID puede tener más de
12 caracteres alfanuméricos, además de algunos caracteres especiales. El nombre
asignado a la cámara se puede colocar en diferentes puntos de la pantalla usando el
submenú POSICIÓN.
(CÁMARA ID)
(PROG CÁMARA)
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
ON...
INT
3
OFF
SALIDA
SALIR
Preslone
[Entre]
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ✽ ()/
SP ï î SP
POSICIÓN...
VUE
SCC-641P.....
“…”Significa que hay submenús.
3-4
3-5
SYNC
DET MOVI
En el menú SYNC, se selecciona el tipo de sincronización
(PROG CÁMARA)
vertical. La opción Int realiza la sincronización por reloj
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
interno, la opción LíNEA ajusta la sincronización vertical a
la frecuencia de la alimentación exterior.
En DET MOVI, se puede ajustar la función de Detección de Movimiento, Sensibilidad de
ON...
INT
3
OFF
Detección de Movimiento y el área de Detección . Si se ajusta la función de detección de
Movimiento, se detectará el movimiento de un intruso. Cuando el movimiento es detectado, se
activa una señal de alarma.
SALIDA
SALIR
Seleccionar LíNEA y presionar [ENTER]. Se verá el submenú LíNEA BLOC donde se
(PROG CÁMARA)
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
(DET MOVI )
ON...
INT
3
OFF
Preslone
[Entre]
podrá ajustar la fase del LíNEA BLOC.
Se puede utilizar el menú PHASE del submenú LíNEA BLOC para asignar tanto más
SALIDA
ZONA
PRESET...
SENSIBILIDAO MEDIO
VUE
SALIR
FASE como se desee.
Seleccionar ON y presionar [ENTER] en el SSC-1000, se visualizará el submenú
(LíNEA BLOC)
(PROG CÁMARA)
“DET MOVI”. La opción PRESET aplica los valores de fábrica de la función de Detección de
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
ON...
LÍNEA...
3
OFF
detección. En la opción UTIL pulse ENTER, cuando el área no está parpadeando, se puede
[Entre]
SALIDA
Es
Movimiento. Con la opción UTIL, el usuario puede elegir el tamaño y la posición del área de
Preslone
SALIR
usar las botones [izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para mover y ajustar la. Si se presiona
FASE (000)
VUE
---- I ----
[ENTER] cuando la área no esta parpadeando, empezará a parpadear y se podrá usar los
botones [izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para ajustar el tamaño y la posición del área. Pulsar
de nuevo ENTER para salir del menú de ajuste de ZONA. Use el menu SENSIBILIDAD para
ajustar la sensibilidad de la Detección de Movimiento. Cuanto más alto sea el valor ajustado
VEL ZOOM
En el submenú VEL ZOOM se puede seleccionar la
velocidad del Zoom Botón (Tele/Wide).
En el menú VEL ZOOM para seleccionar la velocidad.
1: Magnificar x22 veces necesita unos 17 segundos,
más alta será la sensibilidad de la Detección. ALTO, MEDIO, BAJO.
(PROG CÁMARA)
TAMAÑO
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
ON...
INT
3
OFF
SALIDA
SALIR
Use las teclas
[Izquierda, derecha,
Velocidad muy lenta.
2: Magnificar x22 veces necesita unos 10 segundos,
TAMAÑO
Arriba, Abajo]
POSICIÓN
POSICIÓN
Velocidad lenta.
3: Magnificar x22 veces necesita unos 6 segundos,
Velocidad alta lenta.
4: Magnificar x22 veces necesita unos 3 segundos,
La función de Detección de Movimiento no funciona para valores bajos de OBTURADOR,
Preset, BARRIDO, RONDA Mode o Joystick.
Velocidad muy alta.
3-6
3-7
PROG VÍDEO MENU
SALIDA
Se usa para salir del menú PROG CÁMARA del SCC-641P y volver al menú MAIN
MENU.
IRIS
El nivel de salida de vídeo en el monitor puede ser controlada por el IRIS dependiendo
-SALIR: Ignora el cambio de información y restaura la información grabada.
del nivel de entrada de luz. El nivel de salida de vídeo puede ser ajustada
-GUARDAR: Guarda la información de las condiciones de ajuste del menú.
automaticamente en la opción ALC (Auto Compensación de luz). La apertura y cierre de
-PRESET: Ignora la información cambiada y restaura la programación inicial por defecto
la lente Iris pueden ser realizadas manualmente en el menú MANU.
del menú.
BLC (Submenú del menú ALC/MANU)
Con cámaras convencionales, una fuerte iluminación de fondo interfiere con la claridad
de los objetos, haciéndolos aparecer oscuros. En SCC-641(P), si se fija BLC
(compensación de luz de fondo), submenú del menú ALC/MANU, se resolverá el
(PROG CÁMARA)
problema de la luz de fondo y se producirá una pantalla clara.
CÁMARA ID
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
DET MOVI
OFF
INT
3
OFF
ALC
Seleccionar ALC en el menú IRIS y presionar [ENTER] para entrar en el submenú de
Es
ajuste nivel de salida de vídeo y BLC. El nivel de salida de vídeo puede ser ajustado en
SALIDA
SALIR
campo NIVEL usando las teclas [izquierda, derecha].
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
(ALC)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
Preslone
[Entre]
ZONA
BLC
NIVEL
VUE
PRESET...
OFF
(0)---- I ----
Ajuste de la compensación de contraluz:
Poner el menú BLC a ON para activar la función de compensación de contraluz.
El área se ajusta en el menú ZONA, la opción PRESET ajusta la programación a los
valores iniciales de fábrica, la opción UTIL permite ajustar manualmente el área donde
se aplicará la compensación de contraluz. Pulsar [ENTER] en la opción UTIL, con el
[ENTER] seleccionamos DIMENSIN o POSITIÓN, cuando el área está parpadeando use
las flechas arriba, abajo, izquierda, derecha para ajustar el tamaño del área y su
posición en la pantalla. Pulse [ENTER] para salir de la programación de compensación
de contraluz, pulse [ENTER] una vez más para salir del menú de AZONA.
3-8
3-9
TAMAÑO
(PROG VIDEO)
TAMAÑO
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
Use las teclas
[Izquierda, derecha,
Arriba, Abajo]
POSICIÓN
POSICIÓN
MANU...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
MANU
Si el menú IRIS se ajusta a MANU, aparece el submenú de ajuste manual para abrir y
cerrar el iris. Usar las teclas [izquierda, derecha] en NIVEL para ajustar manualmente
el IRIS.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
Si el objeto estuviera en movimiento se vería borroso.
Si pulsa las teclas izquierda/derecha continuamente, la velocidad aparecerá en el orden
siguiente.
OFF → 1/100(1/120) → 1/250 → 1/500 → 1/1000 → 1/2000 → 1/4000 → 1/10K
→ OFF → AUTOX2 → AUTOX4 → AUTOX6→ AUTOX8 → AUTOX12
→ AUTOX16 → AUTOX24 → AUTOX32 →AUTOX48 → AUTOX64 →
AUTOX96 → AUTOX128 → OFF→FIX X2 → FIX X4 → FIX X6 →
FIX X8 → FIX X12 → FIX X16 → FIX X24→ FIX X32 → FIX X48 →
FIX X64 → FIX X96 → FIX X128
(MANUAL)
MANU...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
Preslone
[Entre]
NIVEL
VUE
(00)---- I ----
Es
CAG
En el menú de CAG (control de ganancia autom·tica), se puede fijar el aumento
automáticamente cuando el brillo de la pantalla se filma en menos que el estándar en
OBTURADOR
En el menú OBTURADOR, se ajustan:
-el obturador eléctrico de alta velocidad que 7 velocidades diferentes desde 1/100 a
condiciones de la baja luz. Para controlar automáticamente el AUMENTO, fije el menú de
CAG a ON o a OFF para un control manual. Si el menú del OBTURADOR se fija a AUTO
obturador de la baja velocidad, el valor del menú de CAG no puede ser cambiado.
1/10.000 de un segundo
-el obturador de baja velocidad AUTO, incrementa la sensibilidad de forma automática
-el obturador de baja velocidad FIJO, incrementa la sensibilidad forma fija.
El incremento de sensibilidad AUTO y FIJO soportan 12 velocidades diferentes desde 2x a
(PROG VIDEO)
128x magnificaciones. El obturador de baja velocidad es la función que ajusta la velocidad
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
del obturador para ver claramente los objetos captados con poca luz. Para bajar
automáticamente la velocidad del obturador ajuste AUTO baja velocidad del obturador. Si el
usuario quiere seleccionar la velocidad del obturador, se ajusta la opción FIJO. Los números
después de AUTO y FIJO son los números de los valores seleccionables. Cuanto más
MANU...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
grande es el valor, más lenta será la velocidad del obturador, así que en una imagen fija la
pantalla se verá más clara.
3-10
3-11
BAL BLANCO
BAL BLANCO
La luz se mide en temperaturas del color y se expresan generalmente en unidades de
El menú BAL BLANCO asegura que el blanco está calibrado normalmente bajo
Kelvin (°k).
cualquier condición de temperatura del color. Cuando el menú BAL BLANCO se fija al
modo de BA, el equilibrio blanco se especifica automáticamente según la temperatura
Las temperaturas generales del color de la luz se muestran abajo.
del color del ambiente.
En el caso de fijar el menú BAL BLANCO al modo de BM, presionando [ ENTER ]
colocando un folio blanco delante de la cámara, se fijará automáticamente el
equilibrio de blancos de acuerdo con la temperatura del color esta vez solamente .
Si el menú BAL BLANCO se fija al modo MANUAL, el usuario puede fijar el equilibrio
10000。K
blanco que considera la iluminación actual.
Cielo azul
- 3200 °K : Fije la temperatura del color a 3200 °K
9000。K
Lluvioso
- 5600 °K : Fije la temperatura del color a 5600 °K
- Usuario: Fije el valor apropiado en el gráfico de ROJO y de azules AJUL.
8000。K
MANU: Seleccione el item de MANU y presione [ ENTER ], aparece el submenú donde
Nublado
Es
usted puede seleccionar el equilibrio blanco manual.
7000。K
Utilice las teclas izquierda / derecha para seleccionar 3200 K, 5600 K o el modo del
UTIL en el menú de PRESET.
6000。K
5000。K
Parcialmente nublado
asoleado
(PROG VIDEO)
4000。K
Fluorescente lámpara
3000。K
Lámpara del halógeno
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
(ABB/MANUAL)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
Preslone
[Entre]
PRESET OFF(UTIL)..
ROJO (00)
---- I ---AJUL (00)
---- I ---VUE
2000。K
Lámpara del tungsteno
Luz de candela
1000。K
3-12
3-13
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
En el menú especial., pueden ser ajustados: POSI/NEGA, PIP, función espejo y nivel
vertical y horizontal del detalle .
- POSI-NEGA : La señal de salida de vídeo es normal/inverso.
- PIP (Imagen en Imagen) : Cuando se activa el zoom Digital, será mostrada la
pantalla reducida a 1/16.
-Espejo : Invierte la señal de salida de vídeo de izquierda a derecha.
-DTL H : Ajusta el nivel del detalle horizontal.
-DTL V : Ajusta el nivel del detalle vertical.
En el menú de auto focus el método de foco se puede fijar en AF,MF, u UNOAF.
- AF : Es el modo automático de autoenfoque, usted puede vigilar la pantalla continuamente
y se enfocará automáticamente. Mientras que mueve las teclas del zoom, se enfocará
automáticamente sin ser necesario usar los botones de FOCUS del teclado.
- MF : Es el modo Maual del enfoque, el usuario ajusta el foco manualmente.
- UNOAF : En modo de UNOAF, el SCC-641(P) enfoca automáticamente solamente
mientras que esté moviendo/parando. Cuando la SCC-641(P) no se está
moviendo, es igual que el modo del MF y cuando está moviendo/parando, es
igual que modo de AF. Utilice las teclas izquierda /derecha para seleccionar AF,
MF, UNOAF en el menú de AUTO FOCUS.
Seleccione ON y presione [ ENTER ], aparecerá el submenú “ ESPECIAL ” para elegir
las funciones especiales.
(PROG VIDEO)
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
(ESPECIAL)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
Preslone
[Entre]
POSI/NEGA
PIP
ESPEJO
DTL H
DTL V
VUE
+/OFF
OFF
( 0)---- I ---( 0)--- I -----
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
Es
D-ZOOM
En el menú de D-ZOOM usted puede elegir la ampliación del zoom Digital. Usted puede
Para elegir las funciones utilizar las flechas izquierda/derecha para seleccionar una
seleccionar una ampliación desde OFF(sin zoom digital), X2, X4, X6, X8 y X10 veces.
opción. En el menú de PIP, seleccione ON y presione [ ENTER ]. Utilice las flechas
Cuando se selecciona el zoom digital x10, y el zoom Optico está en x22 la cámara
realiza un zoom total de x220.
[ izquierda, derecha, arriba, abajo] para fijar la localización de PIP.
Usar las flechas izquierda/derecha del mando SSC-1000 para seleccionar el valor del
※ PIP no funciona en el MODO del OBTURADOR de baja velocidad (función
incremento de sensibilidad AUTO y FIJO)
La función espejo no funciona en las ventanas de PIP.
(ESPECIAL)
POSI/NEGA
PIP
ESPEJO
DTL H
DTL V
VUE
+/ON...
OFF
( 0)---- I ---( 0)--- I -----
Preslone
[Entre]
PIP Screen
zoom en el menú D-ZOOM.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
(PROG VIDEO)
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
SALIR
IRIS
OBTURADOR
CAG
BAL BLANCO
ESPECIAL
AUTO FOCO
D-ZOOM
SALIDA
ALC...
OFF
ON
BA
ON...
UNOAF
X10
SALIR
SALIDA
Es igual que la función SALIDA del menú de la CÁMARA SET.
3-14
3-15
PRESET (Preselección)
PROG POSICIÓN
Un total de 128 preset está disponible, en el preset se puede programar: la posición
PAN/TILT y de Zoom/Foco, y todas las funciones del vídeo asociado. Valores de
Desde “PROG POSICIÓN...” presione [ ENTER ] para entrar
en el submenú PAN/TILT y FOCUS/ZOOM para fijar la
PRESET NO.0
PROG PAN/TILT
PROG ZUMBIDO/FOCO
localización de PAN/TILT y la condición de FOCUS/ZOOM,
0 ~127.
presione [ ENTER ] para volver al menú anterior.
Entre las 128 presets está signados los siguientes:
PRESET 0: Posición Inicial, PRESET 1: ALARMA1, PRESET 2: ALARMA2,
PRESET 3: ALARMA3 , PRESET 4: ALARMA4, PRESET 5: detección de movimiento.
PROG VÍDEO
Esta es la función de configuración de pantalla para cada PRESET.
Consulte la explicación en "Menú PROG VIDEO".
* * MENU * *
(PRESET MAPA)
CÁMARA...
PROG VIDEO ...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
0H1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29
30 31 î ï VUE
ID:PRESET 0
Preslone
[Entre]
PRESET ID
PRESET NO.0 ID
Esta es la identificación para cada PRESET. Puede ser
fijada hasta 12 caracteres usando las flechas izquierda,
derecha, arriba, abajo. La localización de la identificación se
puede fijar en el submenú de la “POSICIÓN... ”.
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:! - + * ()/
SP ï î SP
POSICIÓN...
VUE
PRESET 0....
Es
BARRIDO
Esta función permite la programación de la secuencia
PRESET NO.0
Preslone
[Entre]
PROG POSICIÓN
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BARRIDO
CICLO TIEMPO
...
OFF
ON...
ON
2 S
SALIDA
SALIR
de presets. (desde el n °£de preset más bajo al más alto
incluidos en la secuencia ininterrumpidamente)
Cuando se ajusta a ON el preset se incluye en la
PRESET NO.0
PROG POSICIÓN
PROG VIDEO
PRESET ID
BARRIDO
CICLO TIEMPO
...
OFF
ON...
ON
2 S
SALIDA
SALIR
secuencia, a OFF el preset no se incluye en la secuencia.
CICLO TIEMPO
Esta es la función que fija el tiempo de permanencia del preset dentro de la secuencia
de presets Se puede fijar Tiempo de 1 ~ 60 Sec.
SALIDA
Se usa para salir del menú CAMERA SET del SCC-641P y volver al menú MAIN MENU.
SALIR: para salir de programación sin guardar los datos modificados.
GUARDAR: para salir de programación salvando los datos modificados.
PRESET: restaura los valores iniciales programados de fábrica.
3-16
3-17
MODO AUTO
PROG STOP
Incluye as funciones de AUTO PAN y RONDA.
Desde AUTO PAN entre en “PROG STOP...”
presionando [ ENTER ], aparecerá una pantalla con el
mensaje SET END parpadeando seleccione el fin del
AUTOPAN con el joystick. Presione [ ENTER ] otra
vez para volver al menú anterior.vez para volver al
menú anterior.
AUTO PAN
Después de programar el comienzo y fin de los dos parámetros (PAN/TILT) , rota
continuamente entre estas dos posiciones a la velocidad (SPEED) configurada.
TERMINARI!
DIRECCION
* * MENU * *
(AUTO MODO)
CÁMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
AUTO PAN
PROG RONDA
Programar la dirección del movimiento Autopan, a derechas (RIGTH) o a izquierdas
...
1...
(LEFT).
Preslone
[Entre]
"a la derecha ":
"a la lzquierda " :
VUE
Es
AUTO PAN
Preslone
[Entre]
EMPEZAR PROG
PROG STOP
DIRECCION
SIN FIN
VELOCIDAD
CICLO TIEMPO
AUSGANG
...
...
IZQUIERDA
OFF
PASO5
2 S
VERL
SIN FIN
Esta es una función de rotación 360-grado que se para solamente si se programa un
tiempo en la opción CICLO TIEMPO. En On está habilitado en OFF deshabilitado.
EMPERZAR PROG
VELOCIDAD
Desde AUTO PAN entre en “EMPEZAR PROG...”
EMPEZAR!
presionando [ ENTER ], aparecerá una pantalla con el
Esto es una función que fija la velocidad para el movimiento de AUTOPAN. Puede ser
mensaje STAR SET parpadeando seleccione el
fijada de STEP1 a STEP64.
comienzo del AUTOPAN con el joystick. Presione
[ ENTER ] otra vez para volver al menú anterior.
CICLO TIEMPO
Esto es una función para programar el tiempo de permanencia en las posiciones inicial
(START) y final (END) del movimiento de AUTOPAN.
3-18
3-19
RONDA
ALARMA PROG
Esto es una función para programar un recorrido manual elegido por el usuario. Se
Consiste en 4 entradas de ALARMAS y 3 salidas de ALARMAS.
Puede detectar una entrada de información de ALARMA desde un detector exterior y puede
activar un PRESET, un recorrido (RONDA) o señales de salida de ALARMA. Reconoce una
señal de entrada de ALARMA cuando esta está presente más de 150 segundos, el tiempo de
duración de la alarma depende de lo programado en CICLO TEMPO, o de la sociación del
PRESET o RONDA asociados.
pueden programar parámetros de PAN/TILT, ZOOM y FOCO. El recorrido puede ser
de hasta 30 sg.
(AUTO MODO)
* * MENU V1.0 * *
CÁMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
Preslone
AUTO PAN
PROG RONDA
...
1...
[Entre]
* * MENU V1.0 * *
VUE
PROG RONDA1
Preslone
[Entre]
Se pueden fijar 3 RONDA o recorridos.
CÁMARA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
AUTO MODO...
ALARMA PROG...
ALTAR PROG...
(PROG ALARMA)
Preslone
[Entrar]
PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA...
PROG ENT ALARMA...
PROG SAL ALARMA...
PROG RONDA ALARMA...
CONTROL SALIDA AUX...
VUE
Es
PROG PRIORIDAD ALARMA
Este ajuste establece la prioridad de las 4 entradas de alarma,
de tal manera que ALARMA funciona de acuerdo con la
prioridad.
La prioridad predeterminada es ALARMA1: 1, ALARMA2: 2,
ALARMA3: 3, ALARMA4: 4.
Si la alarma está trabajando al el mismo tiempo y la prioridad es
igual, funcionará según la prioridad del valor por defecto.
Cuando la ALARMA está trabajando, no funciona la detección
de movimiento.
PRIORIDAD ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
1
2
3
4
SALIDA
SALIR
Elegir 1,2 o 3 con las flechas izquierda /derecha. y presiona [ ENTER] para entrar en el
menú de configuración del recorrido.
Desde que aparece el mensaje PROG RONDA tiene 30 segundos para programar el
recorrido manual que se memoriza automaticamente. Después de los 30 segundos la
pantalla vuelve al menú anterior. Si quiere salir de la programación del recorrido antes
de los 30 sg. pulse Enter.
PROG ENT ALARMA
Este ajuste establece el tipo de alarma en “N.ABIERTO”
(Normalmente abierto), a “N.CERRADO” (para Normalmente
cerrado), o “OFF” dependiendo de las características del detector
conectado.
ENT ALARMA
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
SALIDA
3-20
N.ABIERTO
N.CERRADO
N.ABIERTO
N.CERRADO
SALIR
3-21
PROG SAL ALARMA
Asigna las entradas de alarma a las 3 salidas de
ALARMA.
ALTRA PROG
SALIDA ALARMA
AC(Auto Calibración)
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
MOVI
1
2
3
2
1
SALIDA
SALIR
Esta función se enciende o apaga Auto Calibración. SCC-C641(P) tiene la función de
Auto Calibración para mejorar la precisión del motor de LENTE y de PAN/TILT.
Usted puede fijar a OFF/6HORA/12HORA/18HORA/24HORA.
Sin la entrada de tecla del usuario por el tiempo señalado por el usuario, A.C. aparecerá
en la pantalla mientras que inicializa LENS y PAN/TILT.
PROG RONDA ALARMA
Fija la operación de los movimientos del recorrido (RONDA)
P.P/T(PROPORTIONAL P/T)
asignados a las entradas de ALARMA y a la Detección de
Esta funcion controla la velocidad de PAN/TILT de forma proporcional de la ampliacion
movimiento (MOVI).
RONDA ALARMA
de ZOOM durante la operacion manual de PAN/TILT. Si usted fija PROPORCIONAL
La correspondencia de asignaciones es la siguiente: Entrada
ALARMA1
ALARMA2
ALARMA3
ALARMA4
MOVI
OFF
OFF
1
2
3
P/T a ON, la velocidad de PAN/TILT aumentara en el modo ZOOM WIDE y disminuira
SALIDA
SALIR
de Alarma 1 activa el Preset 1. Entrada de Alarma 2 activa el
Preset 2. Entrada de Alarma 3 activa el Preset 3. Entrada de
Alarma 4 activa el Preset 4. Entrada de Alarma 4 activa la
detección de movimiento. Cuando se activa una alarma, la
en el modo ZOON TELE en la misma operacion manual.
VUELTA ORIG
imagen empezará en la posición de PRESET correspondiente
Es
Cuando pasa un cierto tiempo sin realizar ninguna orden de movimiento desde el
teclado SSC-1000, la cámara se mueve a la localización del punto inicial
por el tiempo programado en CICLO TEMPO, y la ALARMA
automáticamente. La ubicación inicial (ORIGEN) se puede asignar en el menú de
conectada al RONDA activará el recorrido (RONDA).
posición inicial (POS DEORIG).
Si se establece como OFF en el Menú de configuración, no funciona el patrón (RONDA), y los otros,
significan 1 ➞ RONDA1, 2 ➞ RONDA 2, 3 RONDA 3, MIDIO1 ➞ movimiento continuo de RONDA
1 + RONDA 2, MIDIO 2 ➞ movimiento continuo de RONDA 2 + RONDA 3 y LLENO ➞ movimiento
continuo de RONDA 1 + RONDA2 + RONDA3.
Los tiempos seleccionables de espera hasta el retorno alpunto inicial son:
OFF: Cancelación de la funcion VUELTA ORIG.
OFF ➞ 1 MIN ➞ 2 MIN ➞ 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ➞ ~12HORA
POS DE ORIG
CONTROL SALIDA AUX
Esto establece el movimiento de salida de alarma (SAL
ALARMA) para que continúe o actúe sólo cuando la
alarma esté funcionando.
Puede seleccionar la posición inicial (POS DE ORIG) entre una de las posiciones
CONTROL SALIDA AUX
SALIDA1
SALIDA2
SALIDA3
OFF
OFF
ON
Si se establece como OFF, el movimiento de salida de
(Activa “BAJO”), pero si se establece como ON, la salida
REVOCACIÓN
Cuando se opera la inclinación al límite 90° usando el joystick, la cámara realiza un giro
alarma (SAL ALARMA) funcionará sólo cuando la alarma
esté funcionando.
programadas numeradas del 0 al 127.
automáticamente 180° mostrando trás el giro el área opuesta de la inclinación. Da el
SALIDA
SALIR
efectode ampliar el área de funcionamiento de la inclinación 180°.
de alarma (SAL ALARMA) siempre funcionará,
independientemente de la alarma.
3-22
3-23
RESET CÁM
RESET CÁM borra todos los ajustes que se han hecho hasta el momento y restaura la
configuración predeterminada de fábrica.
Aparece el mensaje “RESET CÁMARA?” cuando usted selecciona RESET CÁM.
Seleccione “CANCELAR” para regresar a la pantalla del menú de configuración o
seleccione OK para restaurar la configuración predeterminada de fábrica.
●
Tenga cuidado cuando efectúe la operación RESET CÁM, ya que ésta elimina todos
valores de la configuración.
Especificaciones de producto
SCC-641
CONTENIDOS
NO
ITEM
1
Tipo de producto
2
Alimentación
3
Consumo
4
Tipo de transmisión
5
Dispositivo de imagen
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Píxels eficaces
- 768(H) x 494(V)
7
Modo de exploracion
8
Frecuencia de línea de
exploracion
9
Modo en sincronización
10
Resolución
11
S/N Ratio
12
Mín iluminacion
- DOME combinando cámara y zoom
- 24 VAC±10% (60Hz± 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- SISTEMA DE COLOR ESTÁNDAR NTSC
- 525 líneas, 2:1 Entrelazado
- Horizontal : 15, 734 Hz(INT) / 15, 750 Hz(L/L)
Vertical :
59.94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LíNEA BLOC
- 480 LINEAS
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (el Sentido Arriba X4)
Es
(0.01 Lux)
13
Temperatura de color
14
Salida de señal
- BA/BM/MANUAL MODE
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B GAIN Regulable)
- VIDEO COMPUESTO 1.0 Vpp 75 Ohms/BNC
- zoom optico x22
15
- Longitud focal: 3.6 a 79.2 mm
Lente
- Apertura F1.6 (Wide) F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto enfoque
- Rango de Pan: 360° Giro continu
16
Función PAN
- Velocidad PAN Preset 240° /seg máximo
- Velocidad PAN Manual: 0.8° a 90°/seg (64 pasos)
- Rango de TILT : 0° ~ 90°
17
Función TILT
- Velocidad TILT Preset 150°/seg máximo
- Velocidad TILT Manual : 0.8°a 45°/seg (64 pasos)
18
- Tele/Wide (ZUMBIDO), Cerac/Lejos (FOCO),
CONTROL REMOTO
abrir/cerrar iris, pan/tilt
- Entradas de Alarma: 4 IN (5 mA sink)
19
- Salidas de Alarma: 3 salidas (Colector abierto : 2
ALARMA
DC24V 40mA Max, Relé : 1, NO, NC, COM 2A
30VDC, 0,5A 125VCA Máx)
20
21
22
Temperatura de
operacion
Humedad de operacion
TAMAÑO
23
3-24
Peso
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- ~90%
- DOMO: 147 mm diámetro
Exterior: 159.5 (diámetro) x 176 (H) (Adaptador: 23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-25
Especificaciones de producto
SCC-641P
ITEM
1
Tipo de producto
2
Alimentación
3
Consumo
4
Tipo de transmisión
5
Dispositivo de imagen
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Píxels eficaces
- 752(H) x 582(V)
7
Modo de exploracion
8
Frecuencia de línea de
exploracion
9
Modo en sincronización
10
Resolución
11
S/N Ratio
12
Mín iluminacion
13
Temperatura de color
14
Salida de señal
Atención
CONTENIDOS
NO
- DOME combinando cámara y zoom
- 24 VAC± 10% (50Hz± 0.3Hz)
•
- 18W
•
- SISTEMA DE COLOR ESTÁNDAR PAL
- 625 líneas, 2:1 Entrelazado
•
El copyright del manual es propiedad de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
El manual no se podrá reproducir de forma electrónica, mecánica,
por audio o por cualquier otro método sin la autorización de
Samsung Electronics.
Este manual se modificará dependiendo de las mejoras del producto.
- Horizontal : 15, 625 Hz(INT) / 15, 625 Hz(L/L)
Vertical :
50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LíNEA BLOC
- 480 LINEAS
- 52dB (CAG OFF)
- 0.3 Lux (el Sentido Arriba X4)
Es
(0.01 Lux)
- BA/BM/MANUAL MODE
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B GAIN Regulable)
- VIDEO COMPUESTO 1.0 Vpp 75 Ohms/BNC
- zoom optico x22
15
Lente
- Longitud focal: 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura F1.6 (Wide) F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto enfoque
- Rango de Pan: 360° Giro continu
16
Función PAN
- Velocidad PAN Preset 240° /seg máximo
- Velocidad PAN Manual: 0.8° a 90°/seg (64 pasos)
- Rango de TILT : 0° ~ 90°
17
Función TILT
- Velocidad TILT Preset 150°/seg máximo
- Velocidad TILT Manual : 0.8°a 45°/seg (64 pasos)
18
CONTROL REMOTO
- Tele/Wide (ZUMBIDIO, Cerac/Lejos (FOCO),
abrir/cerrar iris, pan/tilt
- Entradas de Alarma: 4 IN (5 mA sink)
19
ALARMA
- Salidas de Alarma: 3 salidas (Colector abierto : 2
DC24V 40mA Max, Relé : 1, NO, NC, COM 2A
30VDC, 0,5A 125VCA Máx)
3-26
20
Temperatura de
21
operacion
22
Humedad de operacion
23
TAMAÑO Peso
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
- ~90%
- DOMO: 147 mm diámetro
Exterior: 159.5 (diámetro) x 176 (H) (Adaptador: 23.5(H)mm)
- 2Kg
3-27
SmartDome Camera
SCC-641(P)
Istruzioni per l’uso
I
6. Non appoggiare alla telecamera oggetti con capacità conduttive (cacciaviti,
monete e oggetti in metallo) o contenitori pieni d’acqua.
(La mancata osservanza di questa norma può provocare lesioni personali
dovute a incendi e scariche elettriche o alla caduta di oggetti.)
Norme di sicurezza
Scopo di queste informazioni è assicurare un uso corretto del prodotto per
evitare pericoli o danni alla proprietà. Attenersi scrupolosamente a tutte le
norme di sicurezza.
* Le norme si suddividono in “Avvertenze” e “Attenzione” in base alla
seguente distinzione:
Avvertenza: la mancata osservanza di questo tipo di norme può
provocare il decesso o gravi lesioni personali.
Attenzione: la mancata osservanza di questo tipo di norme può
provocare lesioni o danni alla proprietà.
Avvertenze: istruzioni che avvertono di
un possibile rischio di
morte o di gravi lesioni
personali.
Attenzione: istruzioni che avvertono di
un possibile rischio di lesioni
o danni alla proprietà.
Avvertenza
1. Utilizzare esclusivamente l'adattatore in dotazione.
(L’utilizzo di adattatori diversi da quello in dotazione può essere causa di
incendi, scariche elettriche o danni al prodotto.)
2. Quando si collega l’alimentatore e i fili di trasmissione dei segnali,
controllare i terminali delle connessioni esterne prima di eseguire il
collegamento. Collegare i fili del segnale d’allarme ai terminali
corrispondenti, l’adattatore AC alla presa di ingresso della corrente
alternata (AC), e l’adattatore DC all’ingresso di corrente diretta (DC),
rispettando le polarità. (Il collegamento non corretto dell’alimentatore può
provocare incendi, scariche elettriche o danni al prodotto.)
3. Non collegare più telecamere a un solo adattatore.
(Un eventuale sovraccarico può provocare la generazione di calore
anomalo o provocare incendi.) (L’eventuale caduta della telecamera
potrebbe provocare lesioni personali).
4. Inserire correttamente il cavo di alimentazione nell’apposita presa di
corrente. (Un collegamento non corretto può essere causa di incendi.)
5. Quando si installa la telecamera a muro o a soffitto, fissare l’apparecchio in
modo sicuro. (L’eventuale caduta della telecamera potrebbe provocare
lesioni personali).
7. Non installare l’apparecchio in ambienti fuligginosi, polverosi o umidi.
(Così facendo si potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
8. Nel caso in cui dall’unità dovessero uscire odori inconsueti o fumo,
sospendere l’uso del prodotto.
Scollegare immediatamente dalla sorgente di alimentazione e rivolgersi al
centro di assistenza. (Se si continua a utilizzare l’apparecchio in tali
condizioni esiste il rischio di provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
9. In caso di funzionamento anomalo del prodotto, rivolgersi al punto di
vendita in cui si è acquistato l’apparecchio oppure al centro di assistenza
più vicino. Non smontare né modificare il prodotto in alcun modo.
(Samsung non è responsabile di problemi causati da alterazioni non
autorizzate o da tentativi di riparare l’apparecchio.)
10. Durante la pulizia, non spruzzare acqua direttamente sulle parti del
prodotto. (Così facendo si potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche
elettriche). Pulire la superficie con un panno asciutto. Non utilizzare mai
detergenti o sostanze chimiche per la pulizia del prodotto, in quanto
potrebbero provocare lo scolorimento della superficie o causare danni alle
finiture.
Attenzione
1. Non far cadere oggetti sul prodotto e non sottoporlo a forti colpi.
Conservare l’apparecchio in un luogo non soggetto a vibrazioni eccessive
o a interferenze magnetiche.
2. Non installare la videocamera in ambienti soggetti a temperature troppo
elevate (superiori ai 50 gradi centigradi) o troppo basse (inferiori a - 10
gradi centigradi), oppure particolarmente umidi. (Così facendo si
potrebbero provocare incendi o scariche elettriche).
3. Evitare di installare l’apparecchio in luoghi esposti alla luce solare diretta o
in prossimità di fonti di calore come radiatori o caloriferi. (La mancata
osservanza di questa norma può provocare il rischio di incendi.)
4. Se si desidera spostare un apparecchio già installato, spegnere la corrente
prima di spostarlo o reinstallarlo.
5. Installare la telecamera in luoghi ben ventilati.
6. In caso di temporali con fulmini, staccare la spina elettrica dalla presa di
corrente. (La mancata osservanza di questa norma può provocare incendi
o danni al prodotto.)
I
Prima dell’uso
Riconoscimento degli standard
Questo manuale fornisce le istruzioni di base per l’utente della
telecamera modello SCC-641(P). Contiene tutte le istruzioni
necessarie per l’utilizzo del modello SCC-641(P), a partire da una
semplice introduzione alla collocazione e alle funzioni dei
comandi, fino alle modalità di installazione contenute nel menù di
Set-up.
Si consiglia a tutti gli utenti del modello SCC-641(P), sia quelli
esperti che hanno già utilizzato simili telecamere in precedenza,
sia quelli meno esperti, di leggere il manuale prima dell’uso.
Il comando del modello SCC-641(P) che si utilizza con maggiore
frequenza è il menù di Set-up. Il menù di Set-up del modello
SCC-641(P) è descritto dettagliatamente al “Capitolo 3 –
Descrizione del Menù di Set-up”.
L’utilità di questo manuale di istruzioni è massima qualora venga
letto dall’inizio alla fine: tuttavia, per gli utenti che desiderino
consultarne soltanto determinate le sezioni, vengono forniti di
seguito gli indici dei Capitoli.
Il “Capitolo 1 Descrizione di SCC-641(P)” fornisce una breve
introduzione al modello SCC-641(P), corredata di denominazione
e funzioni delle singole componenti, nonché delle Impostazioni di
selezione.
Il “Capitolo 2 Installazione di SCC-641(P)” spiega le procedure
di installazione del modello SCC-641(P) e descrive i requisiti
ambientali di preparazione ed installazione.
Nota bene: il presente dispositivo è stato sperimentato e dichiarato conforme ai
requisiti per gli apparecchi digitali di Classe B, come previsto dalla sezione 15
delle norme della Commissione Federale delle Comunicazioni (FCC). Tali
requisiti si propongono di tutelare l’utente contro eventuali interferenze
dannose dovute ad installazioni in ambiente residenziale. Questo dispositivo
genera, utilizza e può irradiare energia in radiofrequenza e, se non installato ed
utilizzato secondo le istruzioni, potrebbe provocare interferenze dannose nei
confronti delle radiocomunicazioni.
Tuttavia, non è possibile garantire che tale interferenza non abbia luogo su di
una particolare installazione. Qualora questo dispositivo causasse interferenze
dannose alla ricezione radio-televisiva, che possono determinarsi in fase di
accensione e spegnimento del dispositivo stesso, si invita l’utente a tentare di
ridurre l’interferenza effettuando una o più delle seguenti operazioni:
I
- Modificare l’orientamento o la posizione dell’antenna di ricezione.
- Aumentare la distanza tra il dispositivo e il ricevitore.
- Connettere il dispositivo ad una presa su di un circuito diverso da quello a cui
è connesso il ricevitore.
- Rivolgersi al rivenditore o ad un tecnico radiotelevisivo esperto.
Il “Capitolo 3 Descrizione del menù di Set-up” presenta la
struttura del menù di Set-up di SCC-641(P), con spiegazioni
dettagliate delle funzioni relative a ciascun sotto-menù.
L’ “Appendice A Specifiche di prodotto SCC-641(P)” illustra le
caratteristiche specifiche del prodotto SCC-641(P) in categorie
suddivise voce per voce.
1-1
1-2
“Indice”
-SHUTTER
3-10
-AGC
3-11
1-1
-BAL BIANCO
3-12
Descrizione di SCC-641 (P)
1-5
-SPECIAL
3-14
Introduzione al modello SCC-641 (P)
1-6
-AUTO FOCUS
3-15
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P)
1-7
-D-ZOOM
3-15
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P) – Fronte
1-7
-USCITA
3-15
Collocazione dei comandi di SCC-641 (P) – Retro
1-8
PRESET
3-16
CONNESSIONE ADATTATORE
1-9
AUTOMODE
3-18
IMPOSTAZIONI PRELIMINARI
1-10
-AUTO PAN
3-18
Impostazioni di terminazione RS-422A/RS-485
1-11
-PERCORSO
3-20
IMPOSTAZIONI DI SELEZIONE
1-12
-PROG ALLARMI
3-21
Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
2-1
ALTRA PROG
3-23
Controllo del contenuto della scatola
2-2
Precauzioni di installazione e uso
2-3
Preparazione dei cavi
2-5
Connessione dei cavo
2-6
Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
2-7
Descrizione del menù di Setup
3-1
Struttura del menù di Setup
3-2
MENÙ “CAMERA”: Contenuti
3-5
-ID CAMERA
3-5
-SYNC
3-6
-VEL ZOOM
3-6
-ACTIVITY DET
3-7
-USCITA
3-8
MENU PROG VIDEO
3-9
-IRIS
3-9
Prima dell’uso
Capitolo 1
Capitulo 2
Capitulo 3
1-3
Specifiche di prodotto
I
3-25
1-4
Capitolo 1: Descrizione di SCC-641 (P)
In questo capitolo, vengono brevemente illustrati il modello
SCC-641 (P), le sue funzioni principali, la collocazione dei
comandi e le Impostazioni di selezione.
Introduzione al modello SCC-641 (P)
Il modello SCC-641 (P) è la migliore telecamera di sorveglianza integrata a
zoom variabile. Può essere utilizzato insieme alle telecamere a circuito
chiuso in banche o uffici e garantisce un elevato livello di sicurezza.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) è una telecamera di sorveglianza ad alta qualità che
utilizza un obiettivo focale x22 ed uno zoom digitale IC che consente di
migliorare la definizione delle immagini fino a 220 volte.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) comprende una funzione Bassa luminosità (Low
Light) che consente di rilevare immagini anche in ambienti quasi
I
completamente bui; comprende altresì una funzione di Bilanciamento del
bianco che corregge l’immagine naturale a seconda della luce di sottofondo;
una funzione di Compensazione contro-luce che consente una nitida visione
degli oggetti anche con un forte contro-luce, nonché una funzione Autofocus
che regola la focalizzazione a seconda dei movimenti dell’oggetto. Si tratta di
una telecamera multifunzionale che comprende tutte le funzioni fondamentali
offerte dalle altre telecamere di sorveglianza.
Il modello SCC-641 (P) dispone di una funzione di Allarme per le situazioni di
allerta; per spostare la telecamera nella direzione desiderata, è possibile
controllare le funzioni ZOOM-IN e ZOOM-OUT anche a distanza.
1-5
1-6
Collocazione dei comandi
RETRO
FRONTE
I
1-7
1-8
relay esterno
IMPOSTAZIONI PRELIMINARI
CONFIGURAZIONE SET-UP TELECAMERA
L’impostazione del commutatore DIP-switch corrisponde all’esempio sottostante.
Es. Indirizzo telecamera (CAMERA ADDR):
se è su 1, regolare le impostazioni come nel riquadro.
Tabla de adaptador de la SCC-641(P)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
SW500
Impostazioni del Protocollo di comunicazione.
Utilizzare il numero PIN 5~8 del modulo SW 501 per impostare il Protocollo di
comunicazione.
PIN
Comp
PIN5
PIN6
PIN7
PIN8
A
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
E
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
F
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
G
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
ON
ON
ON
I
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
J
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
K
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
A : SAMSUNG(SSC-1000)HALF
B: SAMSUNG (SSC-1000) PIENO
I
SEE
INSTRUCTIN
MANUAL
CONSULTARE
IL MANUALE
D’ISTRUZIONI
L
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SW500
M
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW501
N
ON
OFF
ON
ON
O
OFF
ON
ON
ON
P
ON
ON
ON
ON
(VISTA INFERIORE)
Impostazione della velocità di trasmissione
Utilizzare i PIN 3 e 4 di SW501.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
PIN 3
PIN 4
4800 BPS
ON
ON
9600 BPS
OFF
ON
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
38400 BPS
OFF
OFF
BAUD RATE
1-9
1-10
Impostazioni di terminazione RS-422A/RS-485
IMPOSTAZIONI DI SELEZIONE
Come illustrato nella mappa della struttura, quando il Controller e il modulo RS 422A/RS485 sono connessi, le operazioni di terminazione debbono essere effettuate in base
all’impedenza opposta dal cavo in ognuna delle uscite della linea di trasmissione, al fine
di trasferire i segnali a lunga distanza controllando però la riflessione del segnale a
bassa distanza.
n < 128
Divisione
Terminazione
SW1-ON
<RS-485 in semi-duplex>
Terminazione: utilizzare i numeri 1 e 2 PIN, selezionare ON e la procedura sarà terminata.
n < 128
Divisione
<RS-422A/RS-485 in duplex>
se più telecamere sono state impostate con il medesimo indirizzo,
ATTENZIONE
1-11
può verificarsi un Errore di comunicazione.
Divisione
SW1-ON
SW2-ON
identificativo ricevitore
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-12
I
identificativo ricevitore
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
1-13
SW500-1 SW500-2
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7 SW500-8
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
identificativo ricevitore
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW500-8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
I
1-14
identificativo ricevitore
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
1-15
SW500-1 SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6 SW500-7
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
identificativo ricevitore
SW500-1
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW500-2 SW500-3 SW500-4 SW500-5 SW500-6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW500-7 SW500-8
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
I
1-16
Prima dell’installazione
Capitolo 2: Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
In questo capitolo, ci concentreremo sui controlli da effettuarsi prima di
procedere all’installazione; sui requisiti ambientali per l’installazione;
sulle precauzioni da prendersi durante la procedura di installazione del
modello SCC-641 (P). In seguito, illustreremo la procedura di
installazione di SCC-641 (P) e la connessione dei cavi.
Controllo del contenuto della scatola
Controllare che tutte le componenti sotto elencate siano presenti nella scatola:
SCC-641(P)
I
Mensola di supporto
Manuale dell’utente
Coperchio di rivestimento
2-1
Porta-telecamera
2-2
Precauzioni di installazione e uso
Non posizionare SCC-641 (P) contro la luce del sole.
Sia in funzione, sia spenta, SCC-641 (P) non deve mai stare rivolta verso la
Non cercare di disassemblare SCC-641 (P).
luce del sole. SCC-641 (P) va usata con cautela nelle vicinanze di riflettori o
Rimuovendo le viti o il coperchio, si rischia una scossa elettrica. L’utente dovrà
di altre fonti di luce, nonché di oggetti che riflettano la luce.
evitare di maneggiare l’interno di SCC-641 (P). Qualora si rendesse
necessario controllare l’interno del dispositivo, contattare un distributore
SCC-641 (P) deve essere utilizzata in ambiente stabile. Le condizioni
autorizzato.
ambientali compatibili con il funzionamento sono indicati qui di seguito:
Temperatura: -10 °C ~ + 50 °C (pari a 14 °F ~ 122 °F)
Maneggiare SCC-641 (P) con cautela.
Tasso di umidità: non oltre il 90%
SCC-641 (P) è un prodotto durevole: la cautela nell’utilizzo ne allunga
ulteriormente la durata e previene i guasti. Evitare di scuotere o di comprimere
Occorre disporre di una rete elettrica idonea, da utilizzarsi secondo le
la telecamera per prevenire danni al prodotto: maneggiare e riporre secondo le
caratteristiche specifiche del sistema di alimentazione elettrico di
istruzioni.
SCC-641 (P).
Energia consumata: 18 W
Non esporre SCC-641 (P) alla pioggia o all’umidità. Non utilizzare in
Potenza impegnata: 24 V a corrente alternata; 1.5 A
presenza di acqua.
I
In caso di contatto con acqua, spegnere immediatamente SCC-641 (P) e
contattare un distributore autorizzato. L’umidità può danneggiare SCC-641 (P)
e aumenta il rischio di scossa elettrica.
Non utilizzare detersivi o agenti abrasivi per pulire il corpo principale di
SCC-641 (P).
Qualora il corpo principale di SCC-641 (P) necessitasse di pulizia, utilizzare un
panno asciutto per pulire l’unità. Qualora lo sporco sia difficile da rimuovere,
utilizzare un detersivo delicato e strofinare delicatamente.
2-3
2-4
Preparazione dei cavi
Per installare SCC-641 (P), occorre predisporre i seguenti cavi.
Connessione del cavo
1. Per prima cosa, connettere un’estremità del cavo connettore con innesto a baionetta
al terminale video (VIDEO OUT).
2. ‘Quindi’ connettere l’altra estremità del connettore alla porta di connessione del
monitor.
Cavo dell’adattatore
L’illustrazione sottostante rappresenta il cavo connesso al terminale di alimentazione di
SCC-641 (P), con una tensione nominale di 24 V a corrente alternata e una portata in
regime permanente di 1.5 A.
3.Connettere ora il cavo adattatore. Utilizzare un cacciavite per avvitare una parte delle
due linee dell’adattatore al terminale di alimentazione di SCC-641 (P).
I
Cavo video
Il cavo di SCC-641 (P) è un cavo con innesto a baionetta (BNC) che connette il terminale
video (video output) con la porta di connessione (video input) del monitor.
4. Regolare lo switch posto sotto l’adattatore per ottenere la tensione desiderata. Poi,
connettere la presa dell’adattatore al connettore di alimentazione.
5. Connettere il terminale di controllo a distanza (Remote Control) di SCC-641 (P) con
il Controller esterno.
2-5
2-6
4. [Figure 3-4] Connettere i vari cavi all’ADATTATORE DELLA TELECAMERA (vedi
Installazione di SCC-641 (P)
pagg. 2-6)
1. [Figura 1] Installare la struttura sul soffitto
(Fare riferimento alle istruzioni di Installazione per valutare la lunghezza della
struttura)
* Realizzato sul posto dal costruttore della struttura
[figura 1]
[figura 3]
[figura 4]
I
5. [Figura 5] Incastrare la MENSOLA DI SUPPORTO e l’ADATTATORE DELLA
TELECAMERA ed utilizzare 4 bulloni (PH M4X8) per assemblarli.
ampiezza dell’apertura sul soffitto
2. Realizzare un’apertura sul soffitto nella posizione in cui si intende installare la telecamera
[figura 5]
(l’apertura deve misurare circaØ180)
3. [Figura 2] Assemblare la MENSOLA DI SUPPORTO sul soffitto, avvitando i 4 bulloni.
[figura 2]
2-7
2-8
6. [Figura 6] Incastrare i 3 fori sul retro della TELECAMERA con il CONNETTORE e girare di
circa 15 gradi a sinistra. [Attendere di sentire lo scatto che segnala l’avvenuto incastro e
controllare che la leva di incastro (lever locking) sia nella posizione di incastro]
* Utilizzare le viti (BH M3XL8) per connettere la TELECAMERA con l’ADATTATORE
Capitolo 3: Descrizione del menù di Setup
affinché non si muovano.
[figura 6]
In questo capitolo, ci concentreremo sul menù di Setup di SCC-641
(P). Per prima cosa, vedremo la struttura del menù nel suo complesso,
per poi soffermarci sulle funzioni di ogni singolo menù.
I
7. [Figura 7] Assemblare il COPRI-CALOTTA sulla CALOTTA.
[[figura 7]
2-9
3-1
Struttura del menù di Setup
CAMERA
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
USCITA
OFF/ON...
INT/LINE...
1/2/3/4
OFF/ON...
ESCI/SALVA/PRESET
PROG VIDEO
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE OFF/ON...
ALC.../MANU...
OFF/1/100~1/10K/AUTO/FISSO
OFF/ON
ATW/AWC/MANU...
POSI/NEGA
+/PIP
OFF/ON...
MIRROR
OFF/ON
DTL ORR
(0)----I-DTL VER
(0)---I--RET
AF/MF/UNOAF
OFF/X2~X10
ESCI/SALVA/PRESET
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
PRESET
PROG POSIZIONE
PROG VIDEO
ID PRESET
SCANSIONE
TEMPO DI SCAN
USCITA
MODO AUTO
AUTO PAN
PROG PERCORSO
...
1/2/3
PROG ALLARMI
PROG ALLARMI PRIORITA
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
USCITA
1~4
1~4
1~4
1~4
ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI IN
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI1
USCITA
OFF/NO/NC
OFF/NO/NC
OFF/NO/NC
OFF/NO/NC
ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI OUT
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
ACTIVITY
USCITA
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
1~3
ESCI/SALVA
PROG ALLARMI PERCORSO
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
ACTIVITY
USCITA
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
OFF/1~3/HALF1/HALF2/PIENO
ESCI/SALVA
CON USCITA AUX
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
USCITA
OFF
OFF
OFF
ESCI/SALVA
AC
P.P/T
RIT POS INIZ
POS INIZIALE
AUTO 180
CAM RESET
LINGUA
USCITA
OFF/6ORA/12ORA/18ORA/24ORA
ON/OFF
OFF/1~60MIN/2~12ORA
0~127
OFF/ON
...
ON.../OFF
ON.../OFF
ON/OFF
1~60SEC
ESCI/SALVA/ELIMINA
ALTRA PROG
3-2
I
ITALIANO
ESCI/SALVA
3-3
MENU PROG CAMERA
Il diagramma soprastante rappresenta la struttura del menù di Setup nel suo
Il menù Camera comprende un sottomenù “PROG CAMERA” e un sottomenù
“PROG VIDEO”
complesso. In questa sezione, verrà offerta una descrizione delle
(PROG CAMERA)
caratteristiche del menù di Setup, per permettere a ciascun utente di
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
USCITA
ESCI
personalizzare SCC-641 (P) secondo le proprie necessità.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
ID CAMERA
Il menù ID CAMERA assegna a SCC-641 (P) un numero di identificazione che compare
sul monitor in stato di connessione. Dal menù PROG CAMERA, posizionare il cursore su
ID CAMERA, selezionare ON e premere [Enter]. A questo punto, viene visualizzata una
schermata per la scelta del numero di identificazione di SCC-641 (P). ID Camera
I
dispone di 12 caratteri alfanumerici, più svariati caratteri speciali. Il numero di
identificazione potrà essere collocato sullo schermo nella posizione desiderata,
utilizzando il sottomenù POSIZIONE.
(ID CAMERA)
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
ON...
INT
3
OFF
USCITA
ESCI
premere
[Enter]
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
: ! - + ✽ ()/
SP ï î SP
POSIZIONE...
RET
SCC-641P.....
“....” indica la presenza di sottomenù
3-4
3-5
SYNC
ACTIVITY DET
(PROG CAMERA)
Dal menù SYNC è possibilie selezionare la sincronia
verticale. Il segnale di sincronia verticale supportato da
SCC-641 (P) comprende una modalità INT offerta dal
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
USCITA
ESCI
temporizzatore interno di SCC-641 (P), e una modalità
LINE che regola la sincronia verticale in base alla
Con ACTIVITY DET, si può impostare la funzione di Motion Detection (rilevazione del
movimento), detta Motion Detection Sensitivity, e anche l’area di rilevazione di movimento. Se
è impostata la funzione di Motion Detection, è possibile rilevare i movimenti di un eventuale
intruso. Una volta rilevato il movimento, la funzione innesca automaticamente il segnale di
allarme del Controller.
frequenza della rete di alimentazione esterna.
(PROG CAMERA)
Selezionare LINE e premere [Enter]. Comparirà il sottomenù LINE LOCK, dal quale si
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
USCITA
ESCI
può regolare la fase di LINE LOCK. Si può utilizzare il menù FASE del sottomenù LINE
(ACTIVITY DET)
premere
[Enter]
LOCK per assegnare la fase desiderata.
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
Selezionare ON e premere [Enter]: comparirà il sottomenù di “ACTIVITY DET”. Il menù
(LINE LOCK)
(PROG CAMERA)
OFF
LINE...
3
OFF
ZONA
PRESET...
SENSIBILITA’ MEDIO
RET
“ZONA”, ossia l’area dello schermo su cui si vuole che venga applicata la funzione di
rilevazione del movimento, può essere impostata in modalità PRESET (predefinita) o UTIL
premere
(personalizzata). Se il menù “ZONA” è impostato su PRESET, la funzione di Motion Detection
[Enter]
I
sarà applicata sulle parti fondamentali dello schermo SCC-641 (P) predefinite. Spostando il
USCITA
ESCI
FASE
RET
(000) ---- I ----
cursore del menù ZONA su UTIL e premendo [ENTER], l’utente potrà scegliere l’ampiezza e
la collocazione dell’area dove applicare la funzione di rilevazione del movimento. Quando
l’area non lampeggia, si possono usare i pulsanti [Left, sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; e Down,
VEL ZOOM
basso] per spostare ed impostare la l’ampiezza desiderata. Premendo [ENTER] quando il
cursore non lampeggia, inizierà a lampeggiare, e si potranno quindi utilizzare i pulsanti [Left,
Con il menù VEL ZOOM si può scegliere la velocità del
pulsante zoom (Tele/Wide). Utilizzare i pulsanti sinistro
o destro del menù VEL ZOOM per selezionare la
velocità desiderata.
sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; e Down, basso] per impostare posizione dell’area. Utilizzare i
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
2: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 10 secondi: bassa
Motion Detection. Premendo nuovamente [ENTER], si esce dal menù delle impostazioni di
ZONA. Utilizzare il menù “SENSIBILITA” per impostare il grado di sensibilità della funzione
Motion Detection. Più si aumenta l’altezza, maggiore sarà la sensibilità della funzione di
1: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 17 secondi: velocità
minima
pulsanti [ENTER] e [Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare la posizione e l’ampiezza dell’area di
USCITA
ESCI
rilevazione del movimento.
DIMENSIONE
DIMENSIONE
velocità
3: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 6 secondi: alta velocità
Usare i pulsanti
4: Ingrandimento x22 in circa 3 secondi: velocità
[Left, Right, Up, Down]
massima
POSIZIONE
POSIZIONE
Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, sinistro; Right, destro; Up, alto; Down, basso]
La funzione di Motion Detection non si attiva quando si utilizzano le funzioni SHUTTER,
PRESET, SCANSIONE, PERCORSO, MODE o JOYSTICK in modalità slow (lenta).
3-6
3-7
MENU PROG VIDEO
USCITA
Il menù USCITA si usa per uscire dal menù CAMERA di SCC-641 (P) e tornare al
IRIS
MAIN MENU (menù principale).
-ESCI: ignora le informazioni modificate e ripristina le informazioni precedentemente
Il livello di output video (attività video) del monitor può essere controllato dalla lente IRIS
(lente con obiettivo a diaframma), in base al livello di luce. Il livello di output video può
salvate.
-SALVA: salva le informazioni sulle impostazioni del menù.
essere impostato in modalità ALC (Compensazione Automatica di Luce). L’apertura e la
-PRESET: ignora le informazioni modificate e ripristina le caratteristiche di menù
chiusura della lente Iris può essere definita manualmente utilizzando il menù MANU.
predefinite dalla casa produttrice.
BLC (sottomenù del menù ALC/MANU)
Con le telecamere convenzionali, una forte luce di sottofondo interferisce con la
(PROG CAMERA)
ID CAMERA
SYNC
VEL ZOOM
ACTIVITY DET
OFF
INT
3
OFF
USCITA
ESCI
chiarezza delle immagini, facendole apparire scure. Con SCC-641 (P), impostando la
funzione BLC (Compensazione contro-luce) dal sottomenù ALC/MANU, il problema della
luce di sottofondo è risolto e la visione sullo schermo rimane nitida.
ALC (Compensazione Automatica di Luce)
Selezionare ALC alla voce IRIS e premere [ENTER]; comparirà il sottomenù del livello di
I
output video e BLC (Compensazione contro-luce). Il livello di output video può essere
determinato utilizzando i pulsanti [Left, Right]. Posizionare il cursore BLC su ON e la
Compensazione contro-luce verrà applicata alle aree del teleschermo selezionate con la
funzione ZONA. L’area dello schermo su cui si desidera applicare la Compensazione
contro-luce può essere determinata con le funzioni PRESET o UTIL. Se il menù ZONA è
impostato su PRESET, la compensazione di controluce verrà effettuata sulle aree
predefinite dalla casa costruttrice di SCC-641 (P). Se, al contrario, il menù ZONA si trova
su UTIL e si preme [ENTER], l’utente stesso può scegliere l’area in cui applicare la
compensazione di contro-luce.
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BAL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCIDA
(ALC)
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
DEJAR
premere
[Enter]
ZONA
BLC
LIVELLO
RET
UTIL...
OFF
(0) ---- I ----
Quando il cursore non lampeggia, si possono usare i pulsanti [Left, Right, Up, Down] per
spostare ed impostare la l’ampiezza desiderata. Premendo [ENTER] quando il cursore
non lampeggia, inizierà a lampeggiare, e si potranno quindi utilizzare i pulsanti
[Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare posizione dell’area. Utilizzare [ENTER] e i pulsanti
[Left, Right, Up, Down] per impostare la posizione e l’ampiezza dell’area di Motion
Detection. Premendo nuovamente [ENTER], si esce dal menù delle impostazioni di
“ZONA”.
3-8
3-9
DIMENSIONE
DIMENSIONE
(PROG VIDEO)
POSIZIONE
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
Usare i pulsanti
[Left, Right, Up, Down]
POSIZIONE
MANU...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
MANU
Se la funzione IRIS è su MANU, comparirà sullo schermo una finestra per aprire e
chiudere la lente Iris manualmente. Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right] nella funzione
LIVELLO per impostare manualmente la funzione Iris.
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
OFF → 1/100(1/120) → 1/250 → 1/500 → 1/1000 → 1/2000 →
1/4000 → 1/10K → OFF → AUTOX2 → AUTOX4 → AUTOX6→
AUTOX8 → AUTOX12 → AUTOX16 → AUTOX24 → AUTOX32→
AUTOX48 → AUTOX64 → AUTOX96 → AUTOX128 → OFF→
FISSO X2 → FISSO X4 → FISSO X6 → FISSO X8 → FISSO X12 → FISSO X16 →
FISSO X24→ FISSO X32 → FISSO X48 → FISSO X64 → FISSO X96 → FISSO X128
(MANUALE)
(PROG VIDEO)
MANU...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
Tenendo premuti i pulsanti Left/Right, la velocità verrà illustrata come indicato nel riquadro.
premere
[Enter]
I
LIVELLO
RET
(00) ---- I ----
AGC (Controllo di guadagno automatico)
Dal menù AGC (Controllo di guadagno automatico), si può impostare automaticamente il
guadagno quando la luminosità dell’immagine a schermo sia maggiore delle condizioni di
SHUTTER
Dal menù SHUTTER, è possibile impostare lo shutter (otturatore) elettrico ad alta velocità,
nonché lo shutter AUTO (automatico) a bassa velocità di SCC-641 (P) e lo shutter FISSO a
bassa velocità. L’otturatore elettrico ad alta velocità supporta 7 velocità diverse da 1/100 a
bassa luminosità standard. Per controllare automaticamente la funzione GAIN (guadagno),
impostare il menù AGC su ON, oppure impostarlo su OFF per controllarlo manualmente. Se
il menù dello SHUTTER (otturatore) si trova in modalità AUTO low speed shutter (otturatore
automatico a bassa velocità), il valore del menù AGC non può essere modificato.
1/10.000 al secondo. Gli otturatori AUTO e FISSO a bassa velocità supportano 12 velocità
diverse, aumentabili da 2 a 128 volte. L’otturatore a bassa velocità (Low speed shutter) è la
funzione che imposta l’otturatore a bassa velocità, in modo da vedere chiaramente l’oggetto
filmato anche in carenza di luce. Per rallentare automaticamente la velocità dell’otturatore,
facendo sì che l’apparecchio rilevi la quantità di luce, impostare l’otturatore a bassa velocità
su AUTO. Se l’utente desidera selezionare la velocità dell’otturatore, lo imposterà su FISSO.
Il numero che segue AUTO e FISSO indica il numero dei campi memorizzati. Maggiore è il
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
MANU...
OFF
ON
ATW
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
numero dei campi, più lenta sarà la velocità dell’otturatore: in questo modo, i fotogrammi fissi
appariranno più nitidi sullo schermo.
Se l’oggetto è in movimento, l’immagine sarà invece mossa.
3-10
3-11
BIL BIANCO
BIL BIANCO
I gradi di luminosità sono generalmente indicati come temperature di colore, ed
Il menù di BIL BIANCO serve perché il bianco sia calibrato in modo normale a qualunque
temperatura di colore. Quando il menù di BIL BIANCO si trova in modalità ATW, il
espresse in gradi Kelvin (°K).
bilanciamento del bianco viene specificato automaticamente a seconda della
Le temperature di colore generali in relazione alla luminosità sono elencate qui sotto.
temperatura di colore. Qualora l’impostazione del menù di BIL BIANCO corrisponda
invece alla modalità AWC, occorre premere [ENTER] tenendo un foglio di carta bianca
davanti alla telecamera per impostare automaticamente il bilanciamento del bianco a
seconda della temperatura di colore. L’operazione va eseguita una sola volta.
Se il menù di BIL BIANCO è impostato sulla modalità MANUALE, l’utente potrà
10000。K
impostare il bilanciamento del bianco a seconda dell’illuminazione del momento.
Cielo sereno
- 3200 °K: impostare la temperatura di colore su 3200 °K
9000。K
- 5600 °K: impostare la temperatura di colore su 5600 °K
Pioggia
- UTIL: impostare il valore opportuno, nella tabella ROSSO e BLU
8000。K
MANU: selezionando la funzione MANU e premendo [ENTER], comparirà la finestra
dalla quale si potrà selezionare il bilanciamento del bianco manuale.
Cielo nuvoloso
Utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare 3200 °K, 5600 °K o la modalità UTIL nel
7000。K
I
menù PRESET.
6000。K
5000。K
Cielo parzialmente
nuvoloso
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
Soleggiato
4000。K
(ABB/MANUALE)
MANU...
OFF
ON
MANU...
OFF
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
premere
[Enter]
PRESET
ROSSO
BLU
RET
OFF(UTIL)..
(0) ---- I ---(0) ---- I ----
Lampada fluorescente
3000。K
Lampada alogena
2000。K
lampadina al tungsteno
Lume di candela
1000。K
3-12
3-13
AUTO FOCUS
SPECIALE
Dal menù SPECIALE, si possono regolare le funzioni POSI/NEGA, PIP, MIRROR e il
livello di dettaglio orizzontale e verticale.
-POSI/NEGA: il segnale di output video viene emesso in modalità normale/ inversa.
-PIP (Immagine nell’immagine): quando è attivo lo zoom digitale, compare uno
schermo miniaturizzato in rapporto 1/16.
-MIRROR: inverte il segnale output video.
-DTL ORR: regola il livello di dettaglio orizzontale.
-DTL VER: regola il livello di dettaglio verticale.
Nel menù AUTO FOCUS, il metodo di focalizzazione può essere AF, MF, UNOAF.
- AF: è la modalità AUTO FOCUS: controllando lo schermo, ci si accorge che la
focalizzazione avviene automaticamente. Se si spostano i cursori dello zoom, la
funzione focalizza automaticamente su FOCUS e non è necessario inserire input
manuali.
- MF: è il sistema di focalizzazione manuale: l’utente regola il Focus manualmente.
- UNOAF: nella modalità UNOAF, SCC-641 (P) focalizza automaticamente solo quando si
muove o si arresta. Quando SCC-641 (P) non è in movimento, la funzione è
identica alla modalità MF, mentre quando è in movimento o in fase di arresto, è
identica ad AF.
Utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare AF, MF o UNOAF dal menù AUTO FOCUS.
Selezionare ON e premere [ENTER]: comparirà il sottomenù SPECIALE per scegliere
le funzioni speciali desiderate.
(PROG VIDEO)
(SPECIALE)
(PROG VIDEO)
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
premere
[Enter]
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIRROR
DTL ORR
DTL VER
RET
+/OFF
OFF
(0) ---- I --(0) --- I ----
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
I
D-ZOOM
Per scegliere le funzioni, utilizzare i pulsanti Left/Right per selezionare una funzione.
Nel menù PIP, selezionare ON e premere [ENTER]. Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right,
Up, Down] per impostare la collocazione della funzione PIP.
※ Il PIP non funziona nella modalità SHUTTER low speed (otturatore a bassa velocità)
Anche quanto è attiva la funzione Mirror, il Mirror non funziona nelle finestre PIP.
Con il menù D-ZOOM si può selezionare l’ingrandimento dello zoom digitale.
Si può scegliere un ingrandimento da OFF fino a 10 volte.
Quando la funzione Digital Zoom è selezionata per un ingrandimento di 10 volte, lo
Zoom Ottico ingrandisce l’immagine di 22 volte: pertanto, la telecamera è in grado di
filmare con un ingrandimento fino a 220 volte.
Utilizzare i pulsanti [Left, Right] per selezionare l’ingrandimento desiderato dal menù DZOOM.
(PROG VIDEO)
(SPECIALE)
POSI/NEGA
PIP
MIRROR
DTL ORR
DTL VER
RET
+/ON...
OFF
(0) --- I ----(0) --- I -----
premere
[Enter]
PIP Screen
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
(PROG VIDEO)
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
ON...
UNOAF
OFF
ESCI
IRIS
SHUTTER
AGC
BIL BIANCO
SPECIALE
AUTO FOCUS
D-ZOOM
USCITA
ALC...
OFF
ON
ATW
ON...
UNOAF
X10
ESCI
USCITA
Questa funzione è identica alla funzione USCITA del menù PROG CAMERA .
3-14
3-15
PRESET
Sono disponibili ben 128 funzioni predefinite, tra cui una serie di posizioni PAN/TILT e
Zoom/Focus, nonché impostazioni relative alle condizioni e al monitoraggio dello
schermo (0 ~ 127).
PROG POSIZIONE
PRESET NO.0
Da “Position Set...” premere [ENTER] per entrare nella
PROG ORR/VERT
PROG ZOOM/FUOCO
schermata ORR/VERT, PROG ZOOM/FUOCO ed
impostare la collocazione ORR/VERT e ZOOM/FUOCO,
Tra le 128 funzioni PRESET figurano: PRESET 0: POS INIZIALE, PRESET 1:
quindi premere [ENTER] per tornare al menù superiore.
ALLARME1, PRESET 2: ALLARME2, PRESET 3: ALLARME 3, PRESET 4:
ALLARME4, PRESET 5: impostazione PRESET speciale, corrispondente alla funzione
PROG VIDEO
MOTION.
Questa funzione serve per impostare lo schermo per ciascuna funzione PRESET. Fare
riferimento alla spiegazione fornita alla voce “PROG VIDEO”.
(PRESET MAPPA)
* * MAIN MENU * *
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
premere
[Enter]
0 H 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
10 11 12 13
15 16 17 18
20 21 22 23
25 26 27 28
30 31 î ï
ID:PRESET 0
4
9
14
19
24
29
RET
ID PRESET
ID PRESET NO.0
È la funzione di identificazione per ciascuna funzione
A BCDEFGHIJKL
M N O PQ R S T U V W X
YZ0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
:! - + * ()/
SP ï î SP
POSIZIONE...
RET
PRESET.0....
PRESET.
Può essere impostata con un massimo di 12 caratteri,
utilizzando i pulsanti Left, Right, Up, Down.
L’identificativo può essere impostato dal sottomenù di
I
“POSIZIONE...”
SCANSIONE
PRESET NO. 0
Questa funzione imposta il movimento o nonpremere
[Enter]
PROG POSIZIONE
PROG VIDEO
ID PRESET
SCANSIONE
TEMPO DI SCAN
...
OFF
ON...
ON
2 S
movimento in relazione alla scansione delle immagini.
PROG POSIZIONE
PROG VIDEO
ID PRESET
SCANSIONE
TEMPO DI SCAN
...
OFF
ON...
ON
2 S
USCITA
ESCI
Quando è impostata su “ON” consente la scansione in
movimento, mentre su “OFF”, senza movimento.
USCITA
PRESET NO. 0
ESCI
TEMPO DI SCAN
Questa funzione imposta il TEMPO DI SCAN rispetto alla collocazione predefinita dalla
funzione “SCAN” in movimento. Il TEMPO DI SCAN essere compreso tra 1 ~ 60 secondi.
USCITA
“ESCI”: Non salva le informazioni selezionate e ritorna al menù superiore.
“SALVA”: Salva le informazioni selezionate e ritorna al menù superiore.
“ELIMINA: Cancella le informazioni selezionate e ripristina le funzioni di DEFAULT, per
poi tornare al menù superiore.
3-16
3-17
MODO AUTO
FINE PROG
Le funzioni AUTO PAN e PERCORSO sono in MODO AUTO.
PROG FINE!
Da “FINE PROG”, premendo [ENTER], si accede alla
AUTO PAN
Dopo aver selezionato le collocazioni dei due punti (ORR/VERT) di avvio (START) e
schermata dell’impostazione FINE PROG. Regolare la
collocazione ORR/VERT e premere [ENTER] per
fine (END), si continua fino ad impostare la velocità (SPEED).
tornare al menù superiore.
DIREZIONE
* * MAIN MENU * *
(MODO AUTO)
Impostare la direzione del movimento INIZIALE-FINALE (collocazione PAN standard).
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
AUTO PAN
...
PROG PERCORSO 1...
premere
"destra " :
"sinistra " :
[Enter]
RET
I
AUTO PAN
premere
[Enter]
INIZIO PROG
FINE PROG
DIREZIONE
CONTINUA
VELOCITA
TEMPO DI SCAN
...
...
SINISTRA
OFF
STEP20
2S
USCITA
ESCI
CONTINUA
Si tratta di una rotazione di 360 gradi che si ferma soltanto per il TEMPORIZZAZIONE
(interruzione rotazione) nelle posizioni INIZIALE ed FINALE. La funzione può essere
INIZIO PROG
Da “INIZIO PROG...”, premendo [ENTER], si accede
impostata su “ON” oppure su “OFF”.
PROG INIZIO!
VELOCITÀ
alla schermata dell’impostazione INIZIO PROG. Dopo
Si tratta di una funzione che regola la velocità. Può essere impostata da STEP 1 a STEP
aver selezionato le collocazioni ORR/VERT, premere
64.
nuovamente [ENTER] per ritornare al menù superiore.
TEMPO DI SCAN
Questa funzione regola la durata della fase in cui la rotazione si arresta sulle posizioni
INIZIALE ed FINALE.
3-18
3-19
PERCORSO
PROG ALLARMI
Si tratta di una funzione di replay che consente di impostare le funzioni manuali come
Questa funzione comprende 4 INPUT DI ALLARMI e 3 OUTPUT DI ALLARMI. Il sistema può
ORR, VERT, ZOOM e FUOCO in 30 secondi.
riconoscere un input di ALLARMEI attraverso i SENSORI esterni, funziona attraverso la
funzione PRESET o PERCORSO ed emette i segnali output di ALLARMI OUT.
Il sistema riconosce altresì il segnale input di ALLARMI quale segnale di ALLARMI quando la
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
sollecitazione prosegue per oltre 150 m alla volta e il tempo di ogni movimento di ALLARMI è
(MODO AUTO)
* * MAIN MENU * *
premere
AUTO PAN
PROG PERCORSO
...
1...
stabilito in base alla corrispondenza con il TEMPO DI SCAN relativo alla funzione PRESET e
PERCORSO attivata.
[Enter]
(PROG ALLARMI)
* * MAIN MENU * *
RET
CAMERA...
PROG VIDEO...
PRESET...
MODO AUTO...
PROG ALLARMI...
ALTRA PROG...
premere
[Enter]
PROG ALLARMI PRORITA...
PROG ALLARMI IN...
PROG ALLARMI OUT...
PROG ALLARMI PERCORSO...
CON USCITA AUX...
RET
PROG PERCORSO1
ALLARMI PRIORITA’
premere
In questo modo si imposta la priorità dei 4 input di ALLARMI
[Enter]
in modo che l’ALLARMI possa operare in base alla priorità.
Nell’impostazione predefinita, la priorità è assegnata ad
I
ALLARMI PRIORITA’
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
1
2
3
4
USCITA
ESCI
ALLARMI1: 1, ALLARMI2: 2, ALLARMI3: 3, ALLARMI4: 4.
Se l’allarme si attiva con questo tipo di priorità, funzionerà
come da modalità DEFAULT. Quando l’allarme è in funzione,
Possono esserci 3 pattern. Scegliere 1, 2 o 3 con il pulsante Left o Right del
non è però in grado di rilevare la funzione ACTIVITY.
“PROG PERCORSO”, quindi premere [ENTER] per accedere alla finestra per
l’impostazione del PERCORSO.
“PROG PERCORSO 1” scomparirà per 30 secondi, durante i quali memorizzerà i
movimenti manuali; dopo 30 secondi, si ritornerà al menù superiore.
Se desiderate terminare la procedura di impostazione prima dello scadere dei 30
secondi, premete [ENTER].
ALLARMI IN
Questo comando imposta il TIPO di input su “NO” (Aperto
ALLARMI IN
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
NO
NC
NO
NC
Normale), “NC” (Normal Close, chiuso normale), oppure su
“OFF”, a seconda delle caratteristiche del SENSORE
collegato.
3-20
USCITA
ESCI
3-21
ALLARMI OUT
Ad ogni input di ALLARMI corrisponde uno dei 3 ALLARMI
OUT.
ALTRA PROG
ALLARMI OUT
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
ACTIVITY
1
2
3
1
2
AC(AUTO-CALIBRAZIONE)
Questa funzione attiva o disattiva la funzione di AUTO-CALIBRAZIONE.
SCC-C641(P) supporta la funzione CALIBRAZIONE automatica per aumentaer la
precisione dell'obiettivo e del PAN/TILT. Può mettere OFF/6Ora/12Ora/18Ora/24Ora.
USCITA
ESCI
Senza l’input della chiave del’utente per il tempo desiderato dal utente. A.C. sarà
apparire sullo schermo mentre inizialando LENS e PAN/TILT.
ALLARMI PERCORSO
Questa funzione imposta i movimenti PERCORSO quando
P/T PROPORZIONALE
è rilevato un input di ALLARMI.
Questa funzione controlla la velocità PAN/TILT dell'ingrandimento ZOOM durante
Quando si ha un input di ALLARMI, la procedura
l'operzione manuale di PAN/TILT. Se si imposta il P/T proporzio-nale su ON, la velocità
ALLARMI PERCORSO
PAN/TILT aumenterà nella modalità ZOOM WIDE e diminuirà nella modalità ZOOM
ALLARMI1
ALLARMI2
ALLARMI3
ALLARMI4
ACTIVITY
HALF1
HALF1
PIENO
PIENO
2
TELE.
USCITA
ESCI
corrisponderà allo schema seguente: ALLARMI 1 dà input a
PRESET 1; ALLARMI 2 dà input a PRESET 2; ALLARMI 3
dà input a PRESET 3; ALLARMI 4 dà input PRESET 4, e
ACTIVITY dà input a PRESET 5.
Quando l’ALLARMI è in funzione, rimarrà sulla posizione
PTI POS INIZ
Quando non sono stati inseriti COMANDI per un certo periodo di tempo, la telecamera
PRESET corrispondente all’ALLARMI per la durata del
torna automaticamente alla INIZIALE.
TEMPO DI SCAN, mentre l’ALLARMI connesso al
Nel menu “POS INIZIALE” è possibile assegnare la posizione INIZIALE.
I
PERCORSO continuerà ad eseguire i movimenti di
PERCORSO.
TEMPO IMPOSTATO PER IL RITORNO ALLA PAGINA PRINCIPALE:
OFF: RIT POS INIZ cancellazione delle funzioni
L’impostazione “OFF” del menu “SETUP” non attiva il PERCORSO, il che significa 1 ➞
OFF ➞ 1 MIN ➞ 2 MIN ➞ 3 MIN ~ 60MIN ➞ ~12ORA
PERCORSO 1, 2 ➞ PERCORSO 2, 3 ➞ PERCORSO 3, HALF1 ➞ movimento continuo
di PERCORSO 1 + PERCORSO 2, HALF 2 ➞ movimento continuo di PERCORSO 2 +
PERCORSO 3 e PIENO ➞ movimento continuo di PERCORSO
POS INIZIALE
1+PERCORSO2+PERCORSO3.
Come “POS INIZIALE” è possibile selezionare una delle posizioni preimpostate,
numerate da 0 a 127.
CON USCITA AUX
Questa funzione imposta l’attivazione di ALLARMI OUT per la
rilevazione di movimento, in modo che tale comando prosegua
CON USCITA AUX
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
ON
ON
ON
o si azioni solo quando l’ALLARMI è in funzione. Se è
AUTO 180
Quando il Tilt è in azione con Joystick fino a 90°, il PAN della telecamera ruota
automaticamente di 180°, mostrando il retro dell’area Tilt. L’effetto è quello di
un’estensione a 180° dell’area del movimento di Tilt.
impostato su OFF,
il movimento “ALLARMI OUT” sarà operativo solo quando
USCITA
ESCI
l’ALLARMI è in funzione.
("BASSO" attivo). Se è impostato su “ON”, “ALLARMI OUT”
funzionerà sempre, indipendentemente dallo stato
dell’ALLARMI.
3-22
3-23
CAM RESET
Il comando “CAM RESET” azzera tutte le modifiche apportate e ripristina le impostazioni
predefinite in fabbrica.
Quando si seleziona “CAM RESET”, viene visualizzato il messaggio “CAMERA
RESET?”. Selezionare "ANNULLA" per ritornare al display del menu d’impostazione,
oppure selezionare OK per ripristinare le impostazioni predefinite in fabbrica.
●
Procedere con cautela quando si eseguono le operazioni “CAM RESET”, in quanto
vengono eliminati tutti i valori impostati.
Specifiche di prodotto
SCC-641
NO
Funzione
Contenuto
1
Tipologia di prodotto
- Telecamera Combi Dome con obiettivo focale variabile
2
Alimentazione
3
Consumo di energia
4
Tipologia di trasmissione
5
Dispositivo immagine
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Pixel effettivi
- 768(H) x 494(V)
7
Sistema di scansione
8
Frequenza della
- Orizzontale: 15,734 Hz(INT) / 15,750 Hz(L/L)
Verticale
: 59,94 Hz(INT) / 60 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
- AC 24± 10% (60Hz± 0.3Hz)
- 18W
- Sistema standard colore NTSC
- 525 linee, 2:1 interlace
9
Sincronizzazione
10
Risoluzione
11
12
Rapporto segnale/ rumore (S/N)
Minima illuminazione
- 0.3 Lux (Senso Sopra X4)
13
Temperatura di colore
- ATW/ AWC/ MODALITÀ MANUALE
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B GAIN Court)
14
Uscita video
- 480 Linee TV
- 52 dB (AGC OFF)
(0.01 Lux)
3-24
I
- uscita video composito : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- corpo singolo: 22x lente Zoom
- Lente focale: da 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura: F1.6 (Wide), F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto focus
15
Obiettivo
16
PAN Function
- gamma PAN: 360° continua
- Velocità PAN predefinita: massimo 240° al secondo
- Velocità PAN manuale: 0.8° ~ 90° al secondo (64 Step)
17
TILT Function
- gamma TILT : 0° ~ 90°
- Velocità predefinita TILT: massimo 150° al secondo
- Velocità TILT manuale: 0.8° ~ 45° al secondo (64 Step)
18
CONTROLLO A DISTANZA
- Tele/Wide (ZOOM); Vicino/ Lontano(FOCUS);
Apertura/Chiusura Iris; Pan/ Tilt
- Input di allarme: 4 input (5mA Sink)
- Output di allarme: 3 OUT (tipo Open Collector: 2,
24 V corrente continua, 40 mA Massimo; Relay: 1,
NO, NC, COM 2A 30V in corrente continua, 0.5A
125 V in corrente alternata Massimo)
19
ALLARMI
20
Temperatura di funzionamento
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
21
Umidità di funzionamento
- ~90%
22
SIZE
- Calotta (DOME): 147 (ø),
Sagoma: 159.5( ø) x 176(H), Adattatore: 23.5 (H)mm
23
Peso
- 2Kg
3-25
Specifiche di prodotto
SCC-641P
NO
Funzione
1
Tipologia di prodotto
Contenuto
- Telecamera Combi Dome con obiettivo focale variabile
2
Alimentazione
3
Consumo di energia
4
Tipologia di trasmissione
5
Dispositivo immagine
- 1/4 inch IT CCD
6
Pixel effettivi
- 752(H) x 582(V)
7
Sistema di scansione
- AC 24 ± 10% (50Hz ± 0.3Hz)
Avvertenze
- 18W
- Sistema standard colore PAL
- 625 linee, 2:1 interlace
8
Frequenza della
- Orizzontale: 15,625 Hz(INT) / 15,625 Hz(L/L)
Verticale
: 50 Hz(INT) / 50 Hz(L/L)
- INT/LINE LOCK
9
Sincronizzazione
10
Risoluzione
11
Rapporto segnale/ rumore (S/N)
12
Minima illuminazione
- 0.3 Lux (Senso Sopra X4)
13
Temperatura di colore
- ATW/ AWC/ MODALITÀ MANUALE
(3200° K, 5600° K, R/B GAIN Court)
14
Uscita video
15
Obiettivo
16
PAN Function
- gamma PAN: 360° continua
- Velocità PAN predefinita: massimo 240° al secondo
- Velocità PAN manuale: 0.8° ~ 90° al secondo (64 Step)
17
TILT Function
- gamma TILT : 0° ~ 90°
- Velocità predefinita TILT: massimo 150° al secondo
- Velocità TILT manuale: 0.8° ~ 45° al secondo (64 Step)
18
CONTROLLO A DISTANZA
- 480 Linee TV
- 52 dB (AGC OFF)
• Il copyright del manuale è di proprietà di Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd.
• Il manuale non può essere riprodotto elettronicamente,
meccanicamente, su supporto audio o con qualsiasi altro
metodo senza l’autorizzazione scritta di Samsung Electronics.
• Il presente manuale verrà modificato in base ai miglioramenti
apportati al prodotto.
(0.01 Lux)
3-26
I
- uscita video composito : 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms/BNC
- corpo singolo: 22x lente Zoom
- Lente focale: da 3.6 a 79.2 mm
- Apertura: F1.6 (Wide), F3.8 (Tele)
- Auto focus
- Tele/Wide (ZOOM); Vicino/ Lontano(FUOCO);
Apertura/Chiusura Iris; Pan/ Tilt
- Input di allarme: 4 input (5mA Sink)
- Output di allarme: 3 OUT (tipo Open Collector: 2,
24 V corrente continua, 40 mA Massimo; Relay: 1,
NO, NC, COM 2A 30V in corrente continua, 0.5A
125 V in corrente alternata Massimo)
19
ALLARMI
20
Temperatura di funzionamento
- -10°C ~ +50°C (14°F ~ 122°F)
21
Umidità di funzionamento
- ~90%
22
SIZE
- Calotta (DOME): 147 (ø),
Sagoma: 159.5(ø) x 176(H), Adattatore: 23.5 (H)mm
23
Peso
- 2Kg
3-27
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement